G
DVD PLAYER
LECTEUR DE DVD
DVD-S559
OWNER'S MANUAL
MODE D'EMPLOI
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source
as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this
unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby
mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a
very small quantity of power.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance
of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION
L’appareil n’est pas isolé de la source d’alimentation aussi
longtemps qu’il reste branché sur une prise murale,
même lorsqu’il est éteint. Il est alors dit en mode «Veille».
Dans ce mode, l’appareil consomme très peu de courant.
L’emploi de commandes, de réglages ou un
choix de procédures différents des
spécifications de cette brochure peut entraîner
une exposition à d’éventuelles radiations
pouvant être dangereses.
Das Gerät ist nicht vom Netz getrennt, solange der
Netzstecker noch mit der Wandsteckdose verbunden
ist, selbst wenn das Gerät ausgeschaltet wurde. Dieser
Betriebszustand wird als Bereitschaftsmodus bezeichnet.
In diesem Zustand nimmt das Gerät eine sehr geringe
Menge Strom auf.
ACHTUNG
Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen
oder Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von
Bedienungsvorgängen, die nicht in dieser
Anleitung aufgeführt sind, kann zu einem
Kontakt mit gefährlichen Laserstrahlen führen.
Enheten är inte urkopplad från nätet så länge som den är
ansluten till vägguttaget även om enheten i sig självt är
avstängd. Detta kallas för beredskapsläge och i detta
tillstånd konsumerar apparaten minimalt med ström.
OBSERVERA
Användning av kontroller och justeringar eller
genomförande av procedurer andra än de som
specificeras i denna bok kan resultera i att du
utsätter dig för farlig strålning.
L’unità non è scollegata dall’impianto elettrico di casa
sintanto che rimane collegata ad una presa di corrente
anche se è spenta. Questo modo viene chiamato “modo
di attesa”. In esso, l’unità consuma una quantità molto
bassa di energia per mantenere in memoria le
impostazioni da voi fatte.
ATTENZIONE
Uso di controlli o regolazioni o procedure non
specificamente descritte può causare
l’esposizione a radiazioni di livello pericoloso.
Aunque el propio aparato se encuentre apagado, éste no
se desconectará de la fuente de CA siempre que se
mantenga enchufado a la toma de corriente. Este estado
recibe el nombre de “modo de espera”. En este estado,
este aparato ha sido diseñado para consumir una
cantidad muy pequeña de energía.
PRECAUCIÓN
El uso de los controles o los procedimientos de
ajuste o utilización diferentes de los
especificados en este manual pueden causar
una exposición peligrosa a la radiación.
VOORZICHTIG
De stroomtoevoer naar het toestel is niet afgesloten
zolang de stekker nog in het stopcontact zit, zelfs niet als
het toestel zelf uitgeschakeld is. Deze toestand wordt
“standby” (waak- of paraatstand) genoemd. Het toestel
is ontworpen om in deze toestand.
Gebruik van bedieningsorganen of instellingen,
of uitvoeren van handelingen anders dan staan
beschreven in deze handleiding kunnen leiden
tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
Данное устройство не отсоединено от
источника переменного напряжения до тех
пор, пока оно подключено к настенной
розетке, даже если само данное устройство
выключено. Это состояние называется
режимом готовности. В этом состоянии данное
устройство потребляет очень малое
количество электроэнергии.
Использование органов управления или
настроек или выполнение процедур, отличных
от описанных в данном руководстве, могут
привести к опасному облучению.
:
:
OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN
CAUTION
VORSICHT SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETSEN
:
ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING
:
VARNING
SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR
DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN
:
:
VARO !
CUIDADO
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASER SÄTEILYLLE, ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN
RADIACIÓN LÁSER VISIBLE E INVISIBLE AL ESTAR ABIERTO. EVITAR EXPOSICIÓN AL RAYO.
VIDEO
COAXIAL
S
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1
To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power
cord out and outdoor antennas disconnected
from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reason.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long
periods of time (i.e., vacation), disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on
common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
2
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, or cold. In a
cabinet, allow about 2.5 cm (1 inch) of free space
all around this unit for adequate ventilation.
Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, nor locate this unit in
an environment with high humidity (i.e., a room
with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside
this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit in a location where
foreign objects may fall onto this unit or where
this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e., candles), as they may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
3
4
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to
set the unit in standby mode, then disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the
AC power plug can be reached easily.
5
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall,
spilling the liquid and causing an electrical
shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,
tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct
heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit
rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
LASER SAFETY
This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury,
only a qualified service person should remove the
cover or attempt to service this device.
6
DANGER
This unit emits visible laser radiation when open.
Avoid direct eye exposure to beam.
When this unit is plugged into a wall outlet, do not
place your eyes close to the opening of the disc tray
and other openings or look inside.
7
8
9
Do not use excessive force on switches, knobs
and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the
wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Use only the voltage specified on this unit. Using
this unit with a higher voltage than specified is
dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from
use of this unit with a voltage other than as
specified.
1
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
01
Thank you for purchasing this YAMAHA product.
Please read through this owner’s manual so that you will know how to operate your model
properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future
reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Playing discs
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Disc/content format playback compatibility 5
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . .21
Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Browsing DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc
with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX video and
02 Connecting up
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Connecting using a SCART AV cable . . . . . 9
Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 9
Connecting using the component video
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . 11
JPEG files with the Disc Navigator. . . . . . .22
Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Using repeat play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Switching audio language/channels . . . . .27
Zooming the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . .27
03 Controls and displays
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
04 Getting started
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setting up the player for your TV. . . . . . . . 15
Setting the language of this player’s
on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
06 Audio Settings and Video Adjust
menus
Audio Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Contents
07 Initial Settings menu
Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . .30
Digital Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Parental Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
08 Additional information
Taking care of your player and discs . . . . .35
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . .36
Setting the TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Resetting the player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
DVD-Video regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Selecting languages using the language
code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
3
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
CBhaepfteor 1re you start
•
DivX video compatibility
Features
See DivX video compatibility on page 7.
•
24-bit/192kHz compatible DAC
•
Energy saving design
The on-board 24-bit/192kHz DAC means that
this player is fully compatible with high
sampling-rate discs, capable of delivering
exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic
range, low-level resolution and high-frequency
detail.
An auto power-off function switches the player
into standby if not used for about 30 minutes.
*1
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
*2
•
Excellent audio performance surround
*1
sound entertainment with Dolby Digital
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
*2
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc.
and DTS software
Logos:
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following accessories
are in the box when you open it.
When connected to a suitable AV amplifier or
receiver, this player gives great surround
sound with Dolby Digital and DTS discs.
• Remote control
• AA/R6 dry cell batteries x2
• Power cable
•
PureCinema Progressive Scan video
component video outputs, you can enjoy
same frame refresh rate as the original movie.
• Owner’s Manual
Putting the batteries in the remote
•
•
Open the battery compartment cover
pictures
and insert the batteries as shown.
indications (ꢀ, ꢁ) inside the compartment.
Close the cover when you’re finished.
The new Disc Navigator enables you play the
thumbnail image on screen.
•
DSP effects for enhanced playback
See Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus on
page 28.
•
Picture zoom
See Zooming the screen on page 27.
•
MP3 and WMA compatibility
See Compressed audio compatibility on page 6.
•
JPEG compatibility
See JPEG file compatibility on page 7.
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
• Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the
television uses an indoor antenna.
Important
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards
such as leakage and bursting. Please observe
the following:
• Use in a kitchen or other room where the
player may be exposed to smoke or steam.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with
cloth—this may prevent proper cooling of
the unit.
• Don’t use different kinds of battery
together—although they may look similar,
different batteries may have different
voltages.
• Place on an unstable surface, or one that is
not large enough to support all four of the
unit’s feet.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of
each battery match the indications in the
battery compartment.
Disc/content format playback
compatibility
• Remove batteries from equipment that
isn’t going to be used for a month or more.
This player is compatible with a wide range of
disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs
will generally feature one of the following logos
on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note
however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an
unplayable format—see below for further
compatibility information.
• When disposing of used batteries, please
comply with governmental regulations or
environmental public instruction’s rules
that apply in your country or area.
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this product for
years to come, so please use the following
guidelines when choosing a suitable location:
Please also note that recordable discs cannot be
recorded using this player.
Do...
• Use in a well-ventilated room.
DVD-Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
• Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as
a table, shelf or stereo rack.
DVD+ReWritable
DVD+R
DVD+R DL
DVD+Rewritable
DVD+R
DVD+RDL
Don’t...
• Use in a place exposed to high
temperatures or humidity, including near
radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Audio CD
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
• Place on a window sill or a place where the
player will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Fujicolor CD
• Use in an excessively dusty or damp
environment.
• Place directly on top of an amplifier, or
other component in your stereo system
that becomes hot in use.
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
This player supports the IEC’s Super VCD stan-
dard. Compared to the Video CD standard,
Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and
allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded.
Super VCD also supports the widescreen size.
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio
files will not play in this player—see also
DRM in the Glossary on page 39)
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be
used for the player to recognize MP3 and
WMA files – do not use for other file types)
Super VCD
About WMA
CD-R/RW compatibility
• Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing
MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX video files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both
compatible with this player.
®
The Windows Media logo indicates that this
player can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
• Multi-session playback: No
• Unfinalized disc playback: No
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio
andreferstoanaudiocompressiontechnology
developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA
content can be encoded by using Windows
• File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders
on a disc; up to 648 folders and files
(combined) within each folder
®
®
Media Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media
®
®
DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RWcompatibility
• Compatible formats: DVD-Video, Video
Recording (VR)*
Player for Windows XP, or Windows Media
Player 9 Series.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows
* DVD-RW only. Edit points may not play
exactly as edited; screen may go
momentarily blank at edited points.
logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
• Unfinalized playback: No
• WMA/MP3/JPEG file playback on DVD+R/
RW, DVD-R/RW: No
About DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format
®
created by the DivX video codec from
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
(MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA)
DivXNetworks, Inc. This player can play DivX
video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video,
individual DivX video files are called "Titles".
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW disc
prior to burning, keep in mind that by default
they will be played in alphabetical order.
• Sampling rates: 32, 44.1 or 48kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher
recommended)
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3 playback: No
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA lossless encoding compatible: No
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
®
®
®
®
Displaying DivX subtitle files
• Plays DivX 5, DivX 4, DivX 3 and DivX
VOD video content (in compliance with
The font sets listed below are available for DivX
external subtitle files. You can see the proper
font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle
Language (in Language settings on page 31)
to match the subtitle file.
®
DivX Certified technical requirements).
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must
be used for the player to recognize DivX
video files). Note that all files with the .avi
extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not
all of these are necessarily DivX video files
and therefore may not be playable on this
player.
This player supports the following language
groups:
Group 1: Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca),
Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo),
Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish
(ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-
Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv)
Group 2: Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs),
Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk),
Slovenian (sl)
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used
under license.
Group 3: Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian
(mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk)
Group 4: Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji)
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and
EXIF 2.2* still image files up to a resolution
of 3072 x 2048.
Group 5: Turkish (tr)
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used
under license.
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
• File extensions: .jpg (must be used for the
player to recognize JPEG files – do not use
for other file types)
• Some external subtitle files may be
displayed incorrectly or not at all.
• For external subtitle files the following
subtitle format filename extensions are
supported (please note that these files are
not shown within the disc navigation
menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer
may not be playable in this unit due to the
setting of the application software used to
create the disc. In these particular instances,
check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
• The filename of the movie file has to be
repeated at the beginning of the filename
for the external subtitle file.
• The number of external subtitle files which
can be switched for the same movie file is
limited to a maximum of 10.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF
format) are not compatible with this player.
Check the DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW or CD-R/
RW software disc boxes for additional
compatibility information.
DivX video compatibility
®
• Official DivX Certified product.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
CChoaptnern2 ecting up
Easy connections
The setup described here is a basic setup that allows you to play discs using just the cables
supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo audio is played through the speakers in your TV.
A/V IN
TV
VIDEO
PB/CB
L
AC IN
PCM/q DIGITAL
/DTS/MPEG
COAXIAL
AV
P
R/CR
Y
S
VIDEO
COMNT
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
White
Red
Yellow
To power
outlet
Important
• This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV
via a VCR using audio/video or S-video cables, as the picture from this player will not appear
properly on your TV. (This player may also not be compatible with some combination TV/VCRs
for the same reason; refer to the manufacturer for more information.)
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
1
Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO
Connecting using a SCART AV
cable
OUT L/R jacks to a set of A/V inputs on your
TV.
A SCART-type AV connector is provided for
connection to a TV or AV receiver. The video
output is switchable between ordinary
composite and RGB. See AV Connector Out on
page 31 for how to set it.
Use the supplied audio/video cable,
connecting the red and white plugs to the
audio outputs and the yellow plug to the video
output. Make sure you match up the left and
right audio outputs with their corresponding
inputs for correct stereo sound.
The SCART AV connector also outputs analog
audio, so there is no need to also connect the
AUDIO OUT L/R jacks.
See below if you want to use a component or
S-video cable for the video connection.
2
Connect the supplied AC power cable to
SCART
the AC IN inlet, then plug into a power
outlet.
Note
TV
• Before unplugging the player from the
power outlet, make sure you first switch it
into standby using either the front panel
STANDBY/ON button, or the remote
control, and wait of the -OFF- message to
disappear from the player’s display.
VIDEO
L
R
AV
Y
COMPONENT
U
T
AUDIO OUT
• For the above reasons, do not plug this
player into a switched power supply found
on some amplifiers and AV receivers.
1
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to
connect the AV CONNECTOR (RGB) output
to a SCART AV input on your TV (or AV
receiver).
Connecting using the S-video
output
If your TV (or other equipment) has an S-video
(S1) input, you can use the S-video output on
this player instead of the standard (composite)
output for a better quality picture.
•
Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to
connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-video
input on your TV (or monitor or AV
receiver).
Line up the small triangle above the jack with
the same mark on the plug before plugging in.
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Watching progressive scan video
from the component video outputs
This player can output progressive scan video
from the component video output. Compared
to interlace video, progressive scan video
effectively doubles the scanning rate of the
picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free
image.
S-VIDEO
IN
TV
VIDEO
PB/CB
L
PCM/q DIGITAL
/DTS/MPEG
COAXIAL
R
To set up the player for use with a progressive
scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 31.
scan video, the PRGSVE indicator lights in the
front panel display.
P
R/CR
Y
S
V
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connecting using the
component video output
Important
• If you connect a TV that is not compatible
with a progressive scan signal and switch
the player to progressive, you will not be
able to see any picture at all. In this case,
switch everything off and reconnect using
the supplied video cable (see Easy
You can use the component video output
instead of the standard video out jack to
connect this player to your TV (or other
equipment). This should give you the best
quality picture from the three types of video
output available.
connections on page 8), then switch back
to Interlace (see below).
•
Use a component video cable (not
supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video
input on your TV, monitor or AV receiver.
Switching the video output to interlace
using the front panel controls
Switch the player to standby then, using the
front panel controls, press STANDBY/ON
while pressing ꢂto switch the player back to
Interlace.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
TV
STANDBY/ON
VIDEO
PB/CB
L
PCM/q DIGITAL
/DTS/MPEG
COAXIAL
R
P
R/CR
Y
S
VIDEO
COMNT
DIGITAL OUT
VIDET
AUDIO OUT
ꢂ
DVD-S559
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Connecting up
1
Connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Compatibility of this player with
COAXIAL jack on this player to a coaxial
digital input on your AV receiver.
progressive-scan and high-definition TVs
This player is compatible with progressive
video Macro Vision System Copy Guard.
Consumers should note that not all high-
definition television sets are fully compatible
with this product and may cause artifacts to be
displayed in the picture. In case of 525/625
progressive scan picture problems, it is
recommended that the user switch the
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output
(Interlace). If there are questions regarding our
TV set compatibility with this model, please
contact our customer service center.
DIGITAL IN
(COAXIAL)
AV receiver
VIDEO
P
B/CB
L
PCM/q DL
/DTS/MPE
COAXIAL
R
P
R/CR
Y
S
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
This player is fully compatible with the
complete line of YAMAHA products, including
the projectors DPX-1200, LPX-510 and the
plasma monitor PDM-4220.
Use a coaxial cable (similar to the supplied
video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT jack to a coaxial input on your AV
receiver.
2
Connect the analog AUDIO OUT L/R and
Connecting to an AV receiver
VIDEO OUT jacks on this player to a set of
analog audio and video inputs on your AV
receiver.
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you
need to connect this player to an AV receiver
using the digital audio output.
In addition to a digital connection, we
recommend also connecting using the stereo
analog connection.
AUDIO/
VIDEO IN
AV receiver
You’ll probably also want to connect a video
output to your AV receiver. You can use any of
the video outputs available on this player (the
illustration shows a standard (composite)
connection).
VIDEO
P
B/CB
PCM/q DIGITAL
/DTS/MPEG
COAXIAL
P
R/CR
Y
S
VIDEO
COMNT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
• You can use the SCART AV connector, or
the S-video or component video jacks to
connect to the AV receiver if you prefer.
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
CChaoptnert3rols and displays
Front panel
2
1
3 4
5
6
7
8
DVD-S559
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STANDBY/ON (page 14)
Disc tray
ꢃ (page 17)
ꢄ (page 17)
ꢂ and ꢅ (page 17)
ꢆ (page 16)
Display
ꢇ (page 17)
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Controls and displays
Remote control
13 ENTER (page 14)
14 CLEAR (page 25)
15 ON SCREEN (page 27)
16 MENU (page 18)
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
12
1
2
17 RETURN (page 14)
1
5
9
2
6
0
3
7
4
8
18 AUDIO (page 27)
19 ZOOM (page 27)
13
15
16
CLEAR
ENTER
14
PLAY MODE SURROUND
ON SCREEN
20 ꢈ and ꢉ (SLOW/SEARCH) (page 17, 20
21 ꢇ (PLAY) (page 17)
22 ꢃ (PAUSE) (page 17)
)
3
4
9
TOP MENU
MENU
5
6
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
7
8
17
18
Keep in mind the following when using the
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
STOP
ZOOM
SKIP
SLOW/SEEARCH
• Make sure that there are no obstacles
between the remote and the remote sensor
on the unit.
10
11
PAUSE
PLAY
21
• Remote operation may become unreliable
if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is
shining on the unit’s remote sensor.
• Remote controllers for different devices
can interfere with each other. Avoid using
to this unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(STANDBY/ON) (page 14)
Number buttons (page 17)
PLAY MODE (page 23)
SURROUND (page 28)
TOP MENU (page 18)
• Replace the batteries when you notice a
fall off in the operating range of the remote.
ENTER & cursor buttons (page 14)
HOME MENU (page 14)
SUBTITLE (page 26)
ANGLE (page 27)
10 ꢂ and ꢅ (SKIP) (page 17)
11 ꢄ (STOP) (page 17)
12 OPEN/CLOSE (page 16)
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on
Using the on-screen displays
After making sure that everything is connected
properly and that the player is plugged in,
press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or
remote control to switch the player on.
For ease of use, this player makes extensive
use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs).
All the screens are navigated in basically the
same way, using the cursor buttons
Also, switch on your TV and make sure that it is
set to the input you connected the DVD player
to.
(
) to change the highlighted item and
pressing ENTER to select it.
5
9
6
0
7
8
CLEAR
ENTER
STANDBY/ON
PLAY MODE SURROUND
ON SCREEN
TOP MENU
MENU
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
ZOOM
DVD-S559
Button
What it does
HOME
MENU
Display/exit the on-screen display.
FAQ
• My DVD player switches on but there is
nothing displayed on my TV.
Changes the highlighted menu
item.
Make sure that the TV is set to the correct
video input (not a TV channel). For
example, if you connected this player to the
VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switch your TV
to VIDEO 1.
Selects the highlighted menu
item (both ENTER buttons on the
remote work in exactly the same
way).
ENTER
RETURN
Returns to the main menu
without saving changes.
Note
• This player features a screen saver and an
auto power off function. If the player is
stopped and no button is pressed for
around five minutes, the screen saver
starts. If the disc tray is closed but no disc
is playing and no control is pressed for
about 30 minutes, the player automatically
goes into standby.
Note
• From here on in this manual, the word
‘select’ generally means use the cursor
buttons to highlight an item on-screen,
then press ENTER.
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
Setting up the player for your
TV
Setting the language of this
player’s on-screen displays
If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV, you should
setup the player so that the picture will be
presented correctly. If you have a conventional
(4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default
setting and move on to the next section.
This sets the language of the player’s on-
screen displays.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial
Settings’.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial
Initial Settings
Settings’.
2
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the
Initial Settings
‘Display’ settings.
Initial Settings
2
Select ‘TV Screen’ from the ‘Video
Output’ settings.
Video Output
Language
English
français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Angle Indicator
Initial Settings
Display
Options
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan&Scan)
16:9 (Wide)
Digital Audio Out
TV Screen
Component Out
AV Connector Out
Video Outpu
Language
Display
t
3
Select a language.
Options
The on-screen language will change according
to your selection.
3
If you have a widescreen (16:9) TV,
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu
select ‘16:9 (Wide)’.
screen.
If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, you can
change the setting from 4:3 (Letter Box) to 4:3
(Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Video Output
settings on page 31 for more details.
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu
screen.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Playing discs
04
3
Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using
the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you’re
loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with
the side you want to play face down).
The basic playback controls for playing DVD,
CD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video and MP3/
WMA discs are covered here. Further functions
are detailed in the next chapter.
For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see
Viewing a JPEG slideshow on page 21.
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’
means DVD-Video, DVD+R/RW and DVD-
R/RW. If a function is specific to a
particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
4
Press ꢇ (play) to start playback.
If you’re playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD,
an on-screen menu may appear. See DVD-
Video disc menus on page 18 and Video CD/
Super VCD PBC menus on page 18 for more on
how to navigate these.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
1
5
9
2
6
0
3
7
4
8
• If you’re playing a containing DivX video
files or MP3/WMA audio files, it may take a
few seconds before playback starts, etc.
This is normal.
CLEAR
ENTER
PLAY MODE SURROUND
ON SCREEN
TOP MENU
MENU
Note
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
• You may find with some DVD discs that
some playback controls don’t work in
certain parts of the disc. This is not a
malfunction.
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
STOP
ZOOM
SKIP
SLOW/SSEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY
• If a disc contains a mixture of DivX video
and other media file types (MP3, for
example), first select whether to play the
DivX video files (DivX)or the other media
file types (MP3 / WMA / JPEG) from the
on-screen display.
1
If the player isn’t already on, press
(STANDBY/ON) to switch it on.
If you’re playing a DVD, disc containing DivX
video files or Video CD/Super VCD, also turn on
your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2
Press OPEN/CLOSE (ꢆ) to open the disc
tray.
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
Basic playback controls
Resume and Last Memory
The table below shows the basic controls on
the remote for playing discs. The following
chapter covers other playback features in more
detail.
When you stop playback of a DVD, CD, Video
CD/Super VCD or DivX video discs, RESUME is
shown in the display indicating that you can
resume playback again from that point.
start playback the display shows RESUME and
playback resumes from the resume point. (If
you want to clear the resume point, press ꢄ
(stop) while RESUME is displayed.)
Button
What it does
ꢇ
Starts playback.
If the display shows RESUME or
LAST MEM playback starts from the
resume or last memory point (see
also Resume and Last Memory
below.)
With DVDs and Video CD/ Super VCDs, if you
take the disc out of the player after stopping
playback, the last play position is stored in
memory. If the next disc you load is the same
one, the display shows LAST MEM and
playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the
player stores the play position of the last five
discs. When one of these discs is next loaded,
you can resume playback.
ꢃ
ꢄ
Pauses a disc that’s playing, or
restarts a paused disc.
Stops playback.
See also Resume and Last Memory
below.
ꢈ
(remote
only)
Press to start fast reverse scanning.
Press ꢇ (play) to resume normal
playback.
Note
• The Last Memory function doesn’t work
with VR format DVD-RW discs.
ꢉ
(remote
only)
Press to start fast forward scanning.
Press ꢇ (play) to resume normal
playback.
• If you don’t need the Last Memory function
when you stop a disc, you can press OPEN/
CLOSE (ꢆ) to stop playback and open the
disc tray.
ꢂ
Skips to the start of the current
track, title or chapter, then to
previous tracks/titles/chapters.
ꢅ
Skips to the next track, title or
chapter.
Numbers Use to enter a title/chapter/track
(remote
only)
number. Press ENTER to select.
• If the disc is stopped, playback
starts from the selected title (for
DVD) or track (for CD/Video CD/
Super VCD).
• If the disc is playing, playback
jumps to the start of the selected
title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter
(DVD-Video) or track (CD/Video CD/
Super VCD).
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
DVD-Video disc menus
Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus
Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from
which you can choose what you want to watch.
These are called PBC (Playback control)
menus.
Many DVD-Video discs feature menus from
which you can select what you want to watch.
They may also give access to additional
features, such as subtitle and audio language
selection, or special features such as
You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD
without having to navigate the PBC menu by
starting playback using a number button to
select a track, rather than the ꢇ (play) button.
slideshows. See the disc packaging for details.
Sometimes DVD-Video menus are displayed
automatically when you start playback; others
only appear when you press MENU or TOP
MENU.
1
5
9
2
6
0
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
0
3
7
4
8
CLEAR
ENTER
PLAY MODE SURROUND
ON SCREEN
TOP MENU
MENU
CLEAR
ENTER
PLAY MODE SURROUND
ON SCREEN
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
STOP
ZOOM
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
SKIP
SLOW//SEARCH
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
ZOOM
PAUSE
PLAY
Button
What it does
Button
What it does
RETURN
Displays the PBC menu.
TOP MENU Displays the ‘top menu’ of a DVD
disc—this varies with the disc.
Numbers
(remote
only)
Use to enter a numbered menu
option. Press ENTER to select.
MENU
Displays a DVD disc menu—this
varies with the disc and may be
the same as the ‘top menu’.
ꢂ
Displays the previous menu page
(if there is one).
Moves the cursor around the
screen.
ꢅ
Displays the next menu page (if
there is one).
ENTER
Selects the current menu option.
RETURN
Returns to the previously dis-
played menu screen.
Numbers
(remote
only)
Highlights a numbered menu
option (some discs only). Press
ENTER to select.
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Getting started
FAQ
automatically after a few seconds!
Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for
your player. The region number should be
printed on the disc; check it against the
region number of the player (which you can
regions on page 37.
If the region number is OK, it may be that
the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean the disc
page 35.
• Why won’t the disc I loaded play?
First check that you loaded the disc the
right way up (label side up), and that it’s
clean and undamaged. See Taking care of
your player and discs on page 35 for
information on cleaning discs.
If a disc loaded correctly won’t play, it’s
probably an incompatible format or disc
type, such as DVD-Audio or DVD-ROM. See
Disc/content format playback compatibility
on page 5 for more on disc compatibility.
• I have a widescreen TV so why are there
black bars at the top and bottom of the
screen when I play some discs?
Some movie formats are such that even
when played on a widescreen TV, black
bars are necessary at the top and bottom of
the screen. This is not a malfunction.
• I have a standard (4:3) TV and set the player
to show widescreen DVDs in pan & scan
format, so why do I still get black bars top
and bottom with some discs?
Some discs override the display
preferences of the player, so even if you
have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those
discs will still be shown in letter box format.
This is not a malfunction.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing discs
05
Chapter 5
Playing discs
Playing in slow motion
Note
You can play DVDs at four different slow
motion speeds, forwards and backwards.
Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video can be
played at four different forward slow motion
speeds.
• Many of the functions covered in this
chapter apply to DVD discs, Video CDs/
Super VCDs, CDs, DivX video and WMA/
MP3 JPEG discs, although the exact
operation of some varies slightly with the
kind of disc loaded.
1
During playback, press ꢃ (pause).
• Some DVDs restrict the use of some
functions (random or repeat, for example)
in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a
malfunction.
2
Press and hold ꢈ or ꢉ until slow
motion playback starts.
• The slow motion speed is shown on-
screen.
• When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some
of the functions are not available during
PBC playback. If you want to use them,
start the disc playing using a number
button to select a track.
• There is no sound during slow motion
playback.
3
Press repeatedly to change the slow
motion speed.
4
To resume normal playback, press ꢇ
(play).
Scanning discs
• Depending on the disc, normal playback
may automatically resume when a new
chapter is reached.
You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at
four different speeds (DivX video only one
speed).
1
During playback, press ꢈ or ꢉ to
start scanning.
• There is no sound while scanning DVDs,
DivX video and Video CD/Super VCDs.
2
Press repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen
except when playing a WMA/MP3 track
using the Disc Navigator.
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢇ
(play).
• When scanning a Video CD/Super VCD
playing in PBC mode or a WMA/MP3 track,
playback automatically resumes at the end
or beginning of the track.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback
may automatically resume when a new
chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Playing discs
Frame advance/frame reverse
Button
ZOOM
What it does
You can advance or back up DVD discs frame-
by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX
video file you can only use frame advance.
Pauses the slideshow and zooms the
picture. Press again to toggle
between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (Press
ꢇ (play) to restart slideshow).
1
During playback, press ꢃ (pause).
MENU
Displays the Disc Navigator screen
(see below).
2
Press ꢈ or ꢉ to reverse or advance
a frame at a time.
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢇ
(play).
Note
• Depending on the disc, normal playback
may automatically resume when a new
chapter is reached.
• The time it takes for the player to load a file
increases with large file sizes.
Browsing DVD or Video CD/
Super VCD disc with the Disc
Navigator
Viewing a JPEG slideshow
After loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG
picture files, press ꢇ(play) to start a slideshow
from the first folder/picture on the disc. The
player displays the pictures in each folder in
alphabetical order.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the
contents of a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc
to find the part you want to play.
Pictures are automatically adjusted so that
they fill as much of the screen as possible (if
the aspect ratio of the picture is different to
your TV screen you may notice black bars at the
sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen).
Important
• You can’t use the Disc Navigator with
Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode.
While the slideshow is running:
1
During playback, press HOME MENU
and select ‘Disc Navigator’ from the on-
screen menu.
Button
What it does
ꢃ
Pauses the slideshow; press again to
restart.
Disc Navigator
2
Select a view option.
ꢂ
ꢅ
Displays the previous picture.
Displays the next picture.
Disc Navigator
Title
Chapter
Pauses the slideshow and rotates the
displayed picture 90º (counter)
clockwise. (Press ꢇ (play) to restart
slideshow).
Pauses the slideshow and flips the
displayed picture horizontally or
vertically. (Press ꢇ (play) to restart
slideshow).
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing discs
05
The options available depend on the kind of
disc loaded and whether the disc is playing or
not, but include:
Tip
• Another way to find a particular place on a
disc is to use one of the search modes. See
Searching a disc on page 26.
• Title – Titles from a DVD-Video disc.
• Chapter – Chapters from the current title
of a DVD-Video disc.
• Track – Tracks from a Video CD/Super VCD
disc.
Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX
video and JPEG files with the
Disc Navigator
• Time – Thumbnails from a Video CD/Super
VCD disc at 10 minute intervals.
Use the Disc Navigator to find a particular file
or folder by filename. Note that if there are
other types of files on the same disc, these will
not be displayed in the Disc Navigator.
• Original: Title – Original titles from a VR
mode DVD-RW disc.
• Playlist: Title – Playlist titles from a VR
mode DVD-RW disc.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc
• Original: Time – Thumbnails from the
Original content at 10 minute intervals.
Navigator’ from the on-screen menu.
• Playlist: Time – Thumbnails from the
Playlist at 10 minute intervals.
00:00/ 00:00
0kbps
The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail
images displayed one after another. To display
the previous/next six thumbnails, press ꢂ/
ꢅ (you don’t have to wait for all the
thumbnails to finish playing to display the
previous/next page).
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Folder4
2
Use the cursor buttons (
) and
) to
3
Select the thumbnail image for what
ENTER to navigate.
Use the cursor up/down buttons (
move up and down the folder/file list.
you want to play.
02
01
04
03
06
Use the cursor left button ( ) to return to the
parent folder.
05
Use ENTER or cursor right ( ) to open a
highlighted folder.
• You can also return to the parent folder by
going to the top of the list to the ‘..’ folder,
then pressing ENTER.
Disc Navigator: Title
01- 49: --
You can use either the cursor buttons
) and ENTER to select a thumbnail,
(
or the number buttons.
To select using the number buttons, enter a
two-digit number then press ENTER.
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Playing discs
• When a JPEG file is highlighted, a
thumbnail image is displayed on the right.
1
During playback, press PLAY MODE and
select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the list of
functions on the left.
00:00/ 00:00
Folder2
0kbps
Play Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
A(Start Point)
B(End Point)
Off
File1
File2
File3
File4
File5
Random
Program
Search Mode
2
Press ENTER on ‘A(Start Point)’ to set
3
To play the highlighted track or DivX
the loop start point.
video file or display the highlighted JPEG
file, press ENTER.
3
Press ENTER on ‘B(End Point)’ to set the
loop end point.
the start point and plays the loop.
• When a WMA/MP3 or DivX video file is
selected, playback begins, starting with the
selected file, and continues until the end of
the folder.
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’
• When a JPEG file is selected, a slideshow
begins, starting with that file, and
continues to the end of the folder. When
the slideshow comes to the end of the
foloder, it automatically continues to the
begining of the foloder.
from the menu.
Using repeat play
There are various repeat play options,
depending on the kind of disc loaded. It’s also
possible to use repeat play together with
program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in
the program list (see Creating a program list on
page 25).
Tip
• To play the contents of the whole disc
rather than just the current folder, exit the
Disc Navigator and start playback using
the ꢇ (play) button.
Important
• You can’t use Repeat play with Video CD/
Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with WMA/
MP3 discs.
Looping a section of a disc
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify
two points (A and B) within a track (CD, Video
CD/Super VCD) or title (DVD) that form a loop
which is played over and over.
• You can’t use repeat and random play at
the same time.
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with Video CD/
Super VCDs in PBC mode, or WMA/MP3/
DivX video files.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing discs
05
1
During playback, press PLAY MODE and
Important
select ‘Repeat’ from the list of functions on
the left.
• Random play remains in effect until you
select Random Off from the random play
menu options.
Play Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Title Repeat
Chapter Repeat
Repeat Off
• You can’t use random play with VR format
DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs
playing in PBC mode, WMA/MP3 discs,
DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu
is being displayed.
Random
Program
Search Mode
• You can't use random play together with
program or repeat play.
2
Select a repeat play option.
If program play is active, select Program
Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat
Off to cancel.
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Random’
from the list of functions on the left.
The repeat options available depend on the
kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD
discs, you can select Title Repeat or Chapter
Repeat (or Repeat Off).
Play Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Random Title
Random Chapter
Random Off
Random
Program
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Title Repeat
Chapter Repeat
Repeat Off
Random
2
Select a random play option.
Program
The random play options available depend on
the kind of disc loaded. For example, for DVD
discs, you can select Random Title or
Random Chapter (or Random Off).
Search Mode
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select
Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat
Off).
Play Mode
A-B Repeat
• For DivX video discs, select Title Repeat
(or Repeat Off).
Random Title
Repeat
Random Chapter
Random
Random Off
Program
Search Mode
Using random play
Use the random play function to play titles or
chapters (DVD-Video), or tracks (CD, Video CD/
Super VCD) at random. (Note that the same
track/title/chapter may play more than once.)
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select
On or Off to switch random play on or off.
You can set the random play option when a
disc is playing or stopped.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Playing discs
3
Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to
Tip
select a title, chapter or track for the
current step in the program list.
For a DVD disc, you can add a title or a chapter
to the program list.
• Use the following controls during random
play:
Button
What it does
Program
ꢅ
Selects a new track/title/chapter
at random.
Title 1~38
Program Step
Chapter 1~004
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
01. 01
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
ꢂ
Returns to the beginning of the
current track/title/chapter.
Creating a program list
• For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a
track to add to the program list.
This feature lets you program the play order of
titles/chapters/tracks on a disc.
After pressing ENTER to select the title/
chapter/track, the step number automatically
moves down one.
Important
• You can’t use Program play with VR format
DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs
playing in PBC mode, WMA/MP3 discs,
DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu
is being displayed.
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/
chapters/tracks.
• You can insert steps into the middle of a
program list by just highlighting the
position where you want the new step to
appear and entering a title/chapter/track
number.
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’
from the list of functions on the left.
Play Mode
• To delete a step, highlight it and press
CLEAR.
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Create/Edit
Playback Start
Playback Stop
Program Delete
Random
5
To play the program list, press ꢇ (play).
Program
Program play remains active until you turn off
program play (see below), erase the program
list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the
player.
Search Mode
2
Select ‘Create/Edit’ from the list of
program options.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing discs
05
3
Use the number buttons to enter a title,
Tip
chapter or track number, or a time.
• Use the following controls during program
play:
Play Mode
A-B Repeat
Title Search
Repeat
Input Chapter
Chapter Search
Time Search
Button
What it does
Random
0
0
1
Program
Search Mode
PLAY
MODE
Save the program list and exit
the program edit screen without
starting playback (HOME MENU
does the same).
• For a time search, enter the number of
minutes and seconds into the currently
playing title (DVD/ DivX video) or track (CD/
Video CD/Super VCD) you want playback to
resume from. For example, press 4, 5, 0, 0
to have playback start from 45 minutes into
the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30
seconds, press 8, 0, 3, 0.
ꢅ
Skip to the next step in the
program list.
Other functions available from the
program menu
There are a number of other options in the
program menu in addition to Create/Edit.
4
Press ENTER to start playback.
• Playback Start – Starts playback of a
saved program list
Switching subtitles
• Playback Stop – Turns off program play,
but does not erase the program list
Some DVD and DivX video discs have subtitles
in one or more languages; the disc box will
usually tell you which subtitle languages are
available. You can switch subtitle language
during playback.
• Program Delete – Erases the program list
and turns off program play
Searching a disc
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a
subtitle option.
You can search DVD discs by title or chapter
number, or by time; CDs and Video CD/Super
VCDs by track number or time; DivX video discs
by time.
Current / Total
Subtitle
1/2
English
Note
Important
• Some discs only allow you to change
subtitle language from the disc menu.
Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.
• Search functions are not available with
Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or
with WMA/MP3 discs.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle
Language on page 31.
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Search
Mode’ from the list of functions on the left.
• See Displaying DivX subtitle files on page 7
for more on DivX subtitles.
2
Select a search mode.
The search options available depend on the
kind of disc loaded.
• The disc must be playing in order to use
time search.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Playing discs
screen disappears, press ZOOM again to
display it.
Switching audio language/
channels
When playing a DVD and DivX video disc
recorded with dialog in two or more languages,
you can switch audio language during
playback.
Switching camera angles
Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two
or more angles—check the disc box for details.
When playing a VR format DVD-RW disc
recorded with dual-mono audio, you can
switch between the main, sub, and mixed
channels during playback.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, a
icon appears on screen to let you know that
other angles are available (this can be
switched off if you prefer—see Display settings
on page 32).
When playing a Video CD/Super VCD, you can
switch between stereo, just the left channel or
just the right channel.
press ANGLE to switch angle.
1
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an
audio language/channel option.
The language/channel information is shown
on-screen.
Displaying disc information
Various track, chapter and title information,
such as the elapsed and remaining playing
time can be displayed on-screen while a disc is
playing.
Note
• Some DVD discs only allow you to change
audio language from the disc menu. Press
TOP MENU or MENU to access.
1
To show/switch/hide the information
displayed, press ON SCREEN repeatedly.
• When a disc is playing, the information
appears at the top of the screen. Keep
pressing ON SCREEN to change the
displayed information.
• To set DVD audio language preferences,
see Language settings on page 31.
Zooming the screen
Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part
of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while
watching a DVD, DivX video title or Video CD/
Super VCD or playing a JPEG disc.
1
During playback, use the ZOOM button
to select the zoom factor (Normal, 2x or
4x).
• Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX
video title and JPEG pictures have a fixed
resolution, picture quality will deteriorate,
especially at 4x zoom. This is not a
malfunction.
2
Use the cursor buttons to change the
zoomed area.
You can change the zoom factor and the
zoomed area freely during playback.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus
06
Chapter 6
Audio Settings and Video
Adjust menus
• Audio DRC is only effective through the
Audio Settings menu
digital output when Digital Out is set to
On, and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby
Digital > PCM (see Digital Audio Out
settings on page 30).
The Audio Settings menu offers features for
adjusting the way discs sound.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Audio
Settings’ from the on-screen display.
• The effect of Audio DRC also depends on
your speakers and AV receiver settings.
Audio Settings
Virtual Surround
• Settings: On, Off (default)
2
Select and change settings using the
cursor buttons (
), and ENTER.
Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy realistic
surround sound effects from just two speakers.
Audio Settings
Equalizer
On
Off
Virtual Surround
Audio DRC
Dialog
Tip
• You can also use the SURROUND button
on the remote control to switch Virtual
Surround on.
Audio DRC
• Settings: High, Medium, Low, Off
Note
(default)
• Virtual Surround doesn’t work with DTS,
through either the analog or digital
outputs.
When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low
volume, it’s easy to lose the quieter sounds
completely—including some of the dialog.
Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range
Control) to on can help by bringing up the
quieter sounds, while controlling loud peaks.
• 96kHz linear PCM audio is automatically
downsampled to 48kHz if Virtual Surround
is switched on.
• If the player is outputting Dolby Digital,
DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other
words, no conversion to PCM), Virtual
Surround has no effect on the audio from
the digital output. See Digital Audio Out
settings on page 30 for how to set up the
digital output formats.
How much of a difference you hear depends on
the material you’re listening to. If the material
doesn’t have wide variations in volume, you
may not notice much change.
Note
• How good the surround effect is varies with
the disc.
• Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby
Digital audio sources.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus
• Contrast – Adjusts the contrast between
light and dark (–16 to +16).
Dialog
• Settings: High, Medium, Low, Off
(default)
• Gamma – Adjusts the ‘warmth’ of the
picture (High, Medium, Low, Off
(default)).
The Dialog feature is designed to make the
dialog stand out from other background
sounds in the soundtrack.
• Hue – Adjusts the red/green balance
(Green 9 to Red 9).
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how saturated
colors appear (–9 to +9).
Equalizer
• Settings: Rock, Pop, Live, Dance, Techno,
Classic, Soft, Off (default)
Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Hue and
Chroma Level settings using the cursor left/
The various preset EQ curves are designed to
suit various styles of music.
right (
) buttons.
Brightness
min
max
0
Note
3
Press ENTER to return to the Video
• 96kHz linear PCM audio is automatically
downsampled to 48kHz if the Equalizer is
switched on.
Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit.
Video Adjust menu
From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust
various settings that affect how the picture is
presented.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Video
Adjust’ from the on-screen display.
Video Adjust
2
(
Make settings using the cursor buttons
), and ENTER.
Video Adjust
ꢇ
ꢇ
ꢇ
ꢇ
ꢇ
ꢇ
Sharpness
Brightness
Contrast
Gamma
Hue
Chroma Level
Standard
0
0
Off
0
0
You can adjust the following picture quality
settings:
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of
edges in the picture (Fine, Standard
(default), Soft).
• Brightness – Adjusts the overall
brightness (–20 to +20).
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Settings menu
07
Chapter 7
Initial Settings menu
Using the Initial Settings menu
The Initial Settings menu provides audio and
video output settings, parental lock settings,
Note
• In the table below, the default setting is
and display settings, among others.
shown in bold: other settings are shown in
italics.
If an option is grayed out it means that it
cannot be changed at the current time. This is
usually because a disc is playing. Stop the
disc, then change the setting.
• The Digital Audio Out settings only need to
be set if you have connected the digital
output of this player to an AV receiver, or
other equipment.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial
Settings’.
• Check the owner’s manual supplied with
your other equipment to see which digital
audio formats it’s compatible with.
Initial Settings
• Some settings, such as TV Screen, Audio
Language and Subtitle Language may be
overridden by the DVD disc. Often these
settings can also be made from the DVD
disc menu.
2
Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to
select the setting and option you want to
set.
All the settings and options are explained on
the following pages.
Digital Audio Out settings
Setting
Option
What it means
Digital audio is output from the digital outputs.
No digital audio output.
Digital Out
On
Off
Dolby Digital encoded digital audio is output when playing a
Dolby Digital DVD disc.
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital audio is converted to PCM audio before being
output.
Dolby Digital > PCM
DTS encoded digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.
(Noise will be output if your amplifier/receiver is not compatible
with DTS audio.)
DTS
No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.
96kHz digital audio is converted to 48kHz for digital output.
96kHz digital audio is output as is at 96kHz.
Off
96 kHz PCM Out
96kHz > 48kHz
96kHz
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Initial Settings menu
Setting
MPEG Out
What it means
MPEG encoded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for
digital output.
MPEG > PCM
MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is.
MPEG
Video Output settings
Setting
Option
What it means
TV Screen
Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are
shown with black bars top and bottom.
4:3 (Letter Box)
(See also Screen sizes
and disc formats on
page 36.)
Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are
shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Set if you have a widescreen TV.
16:9 (Wide)
Interlace
Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video.
Component Out
Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see
your TV’s instruction manual for details). See also Switching
the video output to interlace using the front panel controls on
page 10.
Progressive
Note that progressive scan video is only output from the
component video jacks.
Ordinary (composite) video output, compatible with all TVs.
AV Connector Out Video
If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the best picture
quality.
RGB
this setting selected.
Setting
Option
English
What it means
played.
Audio Language
If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be
played.
Languages as displayed
Other Language
Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see
page 37).
If there are English subtitles on the disc then they will be
displayed.
Subtitle Language English
(See also Displaying
DivX subtitle files on
page 7.)
If there is the subtitle language selected on the disc, then it will
be displayed.
Languages as displayed
Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see
page 37).
Other Language
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Settings menu
07
Setting
Option
What it means
DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as
your selected subtitle language, if possible.
DVD Menu Lang.
w/Subtitle Lang.
DVD disc menus will be displayed in the selected language, if
possible.
Languages as displayed
Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see
page 37).
Other Language
Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle
language (see above).
Subtitle Display
On
Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc
(note that some discs override this setting).
Off
Display settings
Setting
Option
What it means
On-screen displays of the player are in English.
OSD Language
English
On-screen displays are shown in the language selected.
Languages as displayed
A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle
scenes on a DVD disc.
Angle Indicator
On
No multi-angle indication is shown.
Off
Options settings
Setting
Option
What it means
See Parental Lock on page 33.
Parental Lock
DivX VOD
–
See About DivX® VOD content on page 34.
Display
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Initial Settings menu
Parental Lock
1
2
Select ‘Password Change’.
• Default level: Off; Default password: none;
Default Country/Area code: us (2119)
Use the number buttons to enter your
existing password, then press ENTER.
To give you some control over what your
children watch on your DVD player, some DVD-
Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If
your player is set to a lower level than the disc,
the disc won’t play.
3
Enter a new password and press ENTER.
This registers the new password and you will
return to the Options menu screen.
Setting/changing the Parental Lock
Some discs also support the Country/Area
Code feature. The player does not play certain
scenes on these discs, depending on the
Country/Area Code you set.
1
Select ‘Level Change’.
2
Use number buttons to enter your
password, then press ENTER.
Note
3
Select a new level and press ENTER.
• Press the cursor left ( ) repeatedly to lock
more levels (more discs will require the
password); press the cursor right ( ) to
unlock levels. You can’t lock level 1.
• Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will
play without requiring the password first.
• If you forget your password, you’ll need to
reset the player to register a new password.
(see Resetting the player on page 37)
This sets the new level and you will return to the
Options menu screen.
Registering a new password
You must register a password before you can
change the Parental Lock level or enter a
Country code.
Setting/changing the Country/Area
code
You can find the Country/Area code list on
page 38.
1
Select ‘Options’, then ‘Password’.
1
Select ‘Country Code’.
Initial Settings
2
Use number buttons to enter your
Digital Audio Out Parental Lock
Password
password, then press ENTER.
Video Output
Language
Display
DivX VOD
Level Change
Country Code
3
Select a Country/Area code and press
ENTER.
Options
There are two ways you can do this:
• Select by code letter: Use the cursor up/
2
Use the number buttons to enter a 4-
down (
code.
) to change the Country/Area
digit password.
The numbers you enter show up as asterisks
(*) on-screen.
• Select by code number: Press the cursor
right ( ) then use the number buttons to
enter the 4-digit Country/Area code.
3
Press ENTER to register the password.
You will return to the Options menu screen.
The new Country/Area code is set and you will
return to the Options menu screen. Note that
the new Country/Area code doesn’t take effect
until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc
is reloaded).
Changing your password
To change your password, confirm your
existing password then enter a new one.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Settings menu
07
®
3
Select ‘Display’.
About DivX VOD content
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this player, you first need to register
the player with your DivX VOD content
provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD
registration code, which you submit to your
provider.
Initial Settings
Digital Audio Out DivX VOD Registration Code
Video Output
Language
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Options
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM
(Digital Rights Management) system. This
restricts playback of content to specific,
registered devices.
Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD provider.
®
Playing DivX VOD content
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD
content not authorized for your player, the
message Authorization Error is displayed
and the content will not play.
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable
a fixed number of times. When you load a disc
containing this type of DivX VOD content, the
remaining number of plays is shown on-screen
and you then have the option of playing the
disc (thereby using up one of the remaining
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that
contains expired DivX VOD content (for
example, content that has zero remaining
plays), the message Rental Expired is
displayed.
• Resetting the player (page 37) will not
cause you to lose your registration code.
Displaying your DivX VOD
registration code
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial
Settings’.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited
number of plays, then you may load the disc
into your player and play the content as often
as you like, and no message will be displayed.
2
Select ‘Options’, then ‘DivX VOD’.
Initial Settings
Digital Audio Out Parental Lock
Display
Video Output
Language
Display
DivX VOD
Options
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Additional information
Chapter 8
Additional information
Cleaning discs
Taking care of your player and
discs
Fingerprints and dust on discs can affect
playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry
cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to
the outside edge as shown below.
General
Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole
and edge.
When you're not using a disc, return it to its
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments
(including under direct sunlight).
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to
clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use
benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents,
including products designed for cleaning vinyl
records.
Don't glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do
not use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-
tipped writing instrument to write on the disc.
Cleaning the unit’s exterior
Don’t use self-adhesive disc labels on discs as
these can cause the disc to warp slightly
during playback causing distortion in the
picture and/or sound.
Unplug the unit before cleaning.
Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt. If the
surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or
six times with water and wrung out well, then
wipe again with a dry cloth.
Damaged and shaped discs
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or
otherwise damaged discs as they may damage
the player.
Do not use furniture wax or cleaners. Never
use thinners, benzine or insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit.
If you use a chemical-impregnated cleaning
cloth, read the instructions carefully before
use. These cloths may leave smear marks on
half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens,
finish with a dry cloth.
This player is designed to be used only with
conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use
shaped discs. YAMAHA disclaims all liability
arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
08
Please note that some movie aspect ratios are
wider than 16:9, so even though you have a
widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a
‘letter box’ style with black bars at the top and
bottom of the screen.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD player’s lens should not become dirty
in normal use, but if for some reason it should
malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your
nearest YAMAHA authorized service center.
We do not recommend using commercially
available lens cleaners for CD players.
Standard TV users
If you have a standard TV, the TV Screen
setting (page 31) of this player should be set to
4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&Scan),
depending on which you prefer.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the player if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if
the temperature of the room rises quickly.
Although the condensation won’t damage the
player, it may temporarily impair its
performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer
temperature for about an hour before
switching on.
Set to 4:3 (Letter Box), widescreen discs are
shown with black bars top and bottom.
Moving the player
Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan), widescreen discs are
shown with the left and right sides cropped.
Although the picture looks larger, you don’t
actually see the whole picture.
If you need to move the player, first press
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the
player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the
display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift
or move the unit during playback—discs rotate
at a high speed and may be damaged.
DVD-Video discs come in several different
screen aspect ratios, ranging from TV
programs, which are generally 4:3, to
CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an
aspect ratio of up to about 7:3.
Please note that many widescreen discs
override the player’s settings so that the disc is
shown in letter box format regardless of the
setting.
Televisions, too, come in different aspect
ratios; ‘standard’ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9.
Note
• Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a
standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings
with a widescreen TV, will result in a
distorted picture.
Widescreen TV users
If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen
setting (page 31) of this player should be set to
16:9 (Wide).
When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format,
you can use the TV controls to select how the
picture is presented. Your TV may offer various
zoom and stretch options; see the instructions
that came with your TV for details.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Additional information
Setting the TV system
2
Using the front panel buttons, hold
down the ꢄ (stop) button and press
STANDBY/ON to switch the player back on.
All the player’s settings are now reset.
The default setting of this player is AUTO, and
unless you notice that the picture is distorted
when playing some discs, you should leave it
set to AUTO. If you experience picture distor-
tion with some discs, set the TV system to
match your country or region’s system. Doing
this, however, may restrict the kinds of disc you
can watch. The table below shows what kinds
of disc are compatible with each setting
(AUTO, PAL and NTSC).
DVD-Video regions
All DVD-Video discs carry a region mark on the
case somewhere that indicates which
region(s) of the world the disc is compatible
with. Your DVD player also has a region mark,
which you can find on the rear panel. Discs
from incompatible regions will not play in this
player. Discs marked ALL will play in any
player.
1
If the player is on, press STANDBY/ON
to switch it to standby.
2
Using the front panel controls, hold
The diagram below shows the various DVD
regions of the world.
down ꢅ then press STANDBY/ON to
switch the TV system.
The TV system changes as follows:
1
• AUTO
• NTSC
• PAL
NTSC
PAL
5
2
1
6
2
AUTO
3
4
5
2
4
Note
• You have to switch the player into standby
(press STANDBY/ON) before each
change.
Selecting languages using the
language code list
Disc
Type
Player setting
Language’ in the Setup Navigator) allow you to
set your preferred language from any of the 136
languages listed in the language code list on
page 38.
Format NTSC PAL AUTO
DVD/Super VCD/ NTSC
Video CD/DivX
Video
NTSC PAL NTSC
NTSC PAL PAL
PAL
CD/MP3/WMA/
JPEG
—
NTSC PAL NTSC or
PAL
1
Select ‘Other Language’.
no disc
2
Use the cursor left/right (
) buttons
to select either a code letter or a code
number.
Resetting the player
3
Use the cursor up/down (
) buttons
Use this procedure to reset all the player’s
settings to the factory default.
to select a code letter or a code number.
See Language code list on page 38 for a
complete list of languages and codes.
1
Switch the player into standby.
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
08
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Afar (aa), 0101
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Twi (tw), 2023
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Urdu (ur), 2118
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Country/Area code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
China, 0314, cn
Japan, 1016, jp
Denmark, 0411, dk
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Russian Federation, 1821, ru
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Additional information
Glossary
MP3
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a
compressed stereo audio file format.
Files are recognized by their file
extension “.mp3”.
Analog audio Direct representation of sound by an
electrical signal. See also Digital audio.
MPEG audio
An audio format used on Video CD/
Super VCDs and some DVD discs.
Aspect ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its
height. Conventional TVs are 4:3;
widescreen models are 16:9.
PBC
(PlayBack
Control)
A system of navigating a Video CD/
Super VCD through on-screen menus
recorded onto the disc.
Digital audio Indirect representation of sound using
numbers. See also Sampling frequency
and Analog audio.
PCM
(Pulse Code
Digital audio encoding system found on
CDs. Good quality, but requires a lot of
Dolby
Digital*1
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Dolby Laboratories that
enables far more audio to be stored on a
disc than PCM encoding. See also PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation).
Modulation) data compared to Dolby Digital, DTS
and MPEG encoded audio. See also
Digital audio.
Progressive
scan video
All the lines that make up a video picture
are updated in one pass (compared to
interlace which takes two passes to
update the whole picture).
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy
protection is a technology designed to
prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on
devices other the PC (or other WMA
recording equipment) used to record it.
For detailed information, please see the
instruction manuals or help files that
came with your PC (or other WMA
recording equipment) and/or software.
DRM WMA)
(
Regions
These associate DVD-Video discs and
players with particular areas of the
world. See DVD-Video regions on
page 37 for more information.
Sampling
frequency
The rate at which sound is measured to
be turned into digital audio data. The
higher the rate, the better the sound
quality. CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up
to 96 kHz. See also Digital audio.
DTS*2
EXIF
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Digital Theater Systems
that enables far more audio to be stored
on a disc than PCM encoding. See also
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation).
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and refers to an audio compression
technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. Files are recognized by
their file extension “.wma”.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the
Windows logo are trademarks, or
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
A file format developed by Fuji Photo
(Exchangeable Film for digital still cameras. Digital
Image File)
cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which
carries date, time and thumbnail
information, as well as the picture data.
File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to
indicate the type of file. For example,
*1
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
ISO 9660
format
International standard for the volume
and file structure of CD-ROM discs.
*2
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
JPEG
A standard file format used for still
images. JPEG files are identified by the
file extension “.jpg”.
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Specifications
08
Video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA
General
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD player
Power requirements . . .AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 W
Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . 0.7 W
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8kg
Dimensions . . . . 435 (W) x 61 (H) x 213 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . +5°C to +35°C
Audio output (1 stereo pair)
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output
200 mVrms (1 kHz, –20 dB)
Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA
Digital audio characteristics
Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz
(DVD fs: 96 kHz)
RGB (SCART) output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Euroconnector
S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 dB
Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 dB
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0023 %
Component video output
Y (luminance) - Output level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)(Green)
Pb/Cb (color) - Output level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)(Blue)
Pr/Cr (color) - Output level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)(Red)
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA
Digital output
Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA
IEC60958 for CDDA/LPCM
IEC61937 for MPEG 1/2,
Dolby Digital and DTS
Accessories
S-video output
Audio/video cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Owner’s manual
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (color) - Output level . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Connection. . . . . . . . .S-video (Mini, DIN, 4 pins)
The specifications and design of this product are subject to
change without notice, due to improvement.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
J2G53921B SH 06/03
2005
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J
A
WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Thailand
J2G53921B
(WG69400-1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
NS-P110
NS-P116
(NS-P110/NS-P116: NX-E130 + NX-C130 + SW-P130)
HOME CINEMA 5.1CH SPEAKER PACKAGE
HOME CINEMA 6.1CH SPEAKER PACKAGE
OWNER’S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Follow all instructions.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
8
9
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the
appliance.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this system in
the space below.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
Model:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the main
unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for
future reference.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
● Be sure to allow spaces of at least 20 cm above,
behind and on both sides of the subwoofer.
● Do not place the following objects on this unit:
A vessel with water in it.
If the vessel falls by vibrations and water spills, it
may cause damage to the unit, and/or you may get
an electric shock.
For Canadian Customers
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the
USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the
instructions found in the users manual, may cause
interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out
of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets
the sound come through loud and clear without annoying
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without
affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA
and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you
to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive
volume levels.
III
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNPACKING
Please check to make sure all listed items are included.
G Front and rear speakers
G Speaker cables
(and rear center speaker for NS-P116)
[4m]
[10m]
NX-E130
X 3
<NS-P110>
<NS-P110>
X 2
<NS-P116>
X 3
X 4
<NS-P116>
X 5
G Subwoofer cable
G Center speaker
NX-C130
G Fasteners (for NX-C130)
X 2
G Subwoofer
SW-P130
G Nonskid pads (for NX-E130)
<NS-P110>
X 2
<NS-P116>
X 3
G Nonskid pads (for SW-P130)
IV
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA NS-P110/NS-P116 Speaker Package.
CAUTION: Read this before operating your unit.
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are
completed.
●
●
Install the speakers in a cool, dry, clean place – away from
windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust,
moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers,
motors). To prevent fire or electric shock, do not expose the
speakers to rain or water.
The voltage to be used must be the same as that specified on
the rear panel. Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for
any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other
than specified.
●
●
To prevent the enclosure from warping or discoloring, do not
place the speakers where they will be exposed to direct sunlight
or excessive humidity.
●
●
To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug
when there is an electric storm.
●
●
Avoid installing the speakers where foreign objects may fall onto
them and/or where they may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing.
Super-bass frequencies reproduced by this unit may cause a
turntable to generate a howling sound. In such a case, move this
unit away from the turntable.
Do not place the following objects on top of the speakers:
This unit may be damaged if certain sounds are continuously
outputted at high volume level. For example, if 20 Hz–50 Hz sine
waves from a test disc, bass sounds from electronic instruments,
etc. are continuously outputted, or when the stylus of a turntable
touches the surface of a disc, reduce the volume level to prevent
this unit from being damaged.
●
●
Other components, as they might cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of the speakers.
●
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they might cause fire,
damage to the speakers and/or personal injury.
●
Containers with liquid in them, as they might cause electric
shock to the user and/or damage to the speakers.
If you hear distorted noise (i.e. unnatural, intermittent “rapping” or
“hammering” sounds) coming from this unit, reduce the volume
level. Extremely loud playing of a movie soundtrack’s low
frequency, bass-heavy sounds or similarly loud popular music
passages can damage this speaker system.
●
●
Do not place the speakers where they are liable to be knocked
over or struck by falling objects. Stable placement will also
ensure better sound performance.
●
Placing the speakers on the same shelf or rack as the turntable
can result in feedback.
●
●
Vibration generated by super-bass frequencies may distort
images on a TV. In such a case, move this unit away from the TV
set.
Secure placement or installation is the owner’s responsibility.
YAMAHA shall not be liable for any accident caused by improper
placement or installation of speakers.
When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp
the plug; do not pull the cord.
●
●
●
Any time you note distortion, reduce the volume control on your
amplifier to a lower setting. Never allow your amplifier to be
driven into “clipping”. Otherwise the speakers may be damaged.
●
●
When not planning to use this unit for a long period (i.e. vacation,
etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
When using an amplifier with a rated output power higher than
the nominal input power of the speakers, care should be taken
never to exceed the speakers’ maximum input.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(For China, Korean and General models)
The voltage selector switch on
the rear panel of this unit must
be set for your local main
Do not attempt to clean the speakers with chemical solvents as
this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
●
●
110V-120V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
voltage BEFORE plugging this
unit into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC,
50/60 Hz.
Do not attempt to modify or fix the speakers. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reason.
220V-240V
Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding
common operating errors before concluding that the speakers
are faulty.
●
Standby mode
For SW-P130
If the POWER switch is set to the ON position and the AUTO
STANDBY switch is set to the HIGH or LOW position, this unit
turns into the standby mode when no signal is received by this
unit for 7 to 8 minutes.
In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
Do not operate this unit upside down. It may overheat, possibly
●
causing damage.
Do not use excessive force on switches, controls or connection
●
wires. When moving this unit, first disconnect the power plug
and the wires connected to other equipments. Never pull the
wires themselves.
Since this unit has a built-in power amplifier, heat will radiate
●
WARNING
from the rear panel. Place the unit apart from the walls, allowing
at least 20 cm of space above, behind and on both sides of the
unit to prevent fire or damage. Furthermore, do not position with
the rear panel facing down on the floor or other surfaces.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
When using a humidifier, be sure to avoid condensation inside
●
this unit by allowing enough spaces around this unit or avoiding
excess humidification. Condensation might cause a fire, damage
to this unit, and/or electric shock.
Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a newspaper, a
●
tablecloth, a curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage
to this unit and/or personal injury.
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPONENTS OF THE PACKAGE
The speaker package “NS-P110 and NS-P116” is designed
for use in a multi-channel audio system such as a home
theater system.
<SW-P130>
Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System with a
built-in power amplifier
● This subwoofer system employs Advanced Yamaha
Active Servo Technology which YAMAHA has developed
for reproducing higher quality super-bass sound. (Refer to
page 12 for details on Advanced Yamaha Active Servo
Technology.) This super-bass sound adds a more
realistic, theater-in-the-home effect to your stereo system.
● The AUTO STANDBY switch saves you the trouble of
setting the POWER switch to the ON or OFF position.
NS-P110 includes four NX-E130 speaker systems, one NX-
C130 speaker system and one SW-P130 subwoofer
system.
NS-P116 includes five NX-E130 speaker systems, one NX-
C130 speaker system and one SW-P130 subwoofer
system.
<NX-E130>
Full range acoustic-suspension speaker system used
for the front and rear speakers (and rear center speaker
for NS-P116)
<NX-C130>
Full range acoustic-suspension speaker system used
for the center speaker
CONTENTS
CONNECTIONS.............................................. 7
An example of basic connections ...................... 7
How to connect speaker cables ........................ 8
USING THE SUBWOOFER (SW-P130) ......... 9
Controls and their functions............................... 9
Automatic-power-switching function ................ 10
Adjusting the subwoofer before use ................ 10
Frequency characteristics ............................... 11
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........ II
UNPACKING..................................................IV
CAUTION .........................................................1
COMPONENTS OF THE PACKAGE ............. 2
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS...................... 3
Placing the subwoofer ....................................... 4
Placing the center speaker ................................ 4
Mounting the front/rear speakers (and rear center
speaker for NS-P116) ........................................ 5
Placing the front/rear speakers (and rear center
speaker for NS-P116) ........................................ 6
ADVANCED YAMAHA ACTIVE SERVO
TECHNOLOGY (for SW-P130) .................... 12
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................. 13
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 14
E-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS
Before making connections, place all speakers in their respective positions. The positioning of the speakers is important
because it controls the whole sound quality of this system.
Place the speakers depending on your listening position by following the instructions below.
Speaker configuration
Placing speakers
Front speakers: On both sides of and at approximately
the same height as the TV set.
<NS-P110>
This speaker package employs a 6 speaker configuration: 2
front speakers, 2 rear speakers, a center speaker and a
subwoofer.
Rear speakers:
Behind your listening position, facing
slightly inward. About 1.8 m (approx. 6
feet) from the floor.
The front speakers emit main source sound. The rear
speakers emit surround sounds, and the center speaker
emits center sounds (dialog etc.). The subwoofer emits
reinforcing low frequencies on your audio system.
Center speaker: Precisely between the front speakers.
Rear center speaker (for NS-P116):
Precisely between the rear speakers.
<NS-P116>
Subwoofer:
The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical because low bass tones are not
highly directional.
This speaker package employs a 7 speaker configuration: 2
front speakers, 2 rear speakers, a center speaker, a rear
center speaker and a subwoofer.
Refer to “Placing the subwoofer” on
page 4 for a recommended positioning
of the subwoofer.
The front speakers emit main source sound. The rear and
rear center speakers emit surround sounds, and the center
speaker emits center sounds (dialog etc.). The subwoofer
emits reinforcing low frequencies on your audio system.
Note
Subwoofer
Front R
In this speaker package, the same speakers (NX-E130)
are used for the front and rear speakers (and rear
center speaker for NS-P116).
Center
Front L
TV-set
Front L
Center
Front R
Rear R
Subwoofer
Rear center
(for NS-P116)
Rear L
These speakers feature a magnetically shielded design,
but there is still a chance that placing them too close to a
TV set might impair picture color. Should this happen,
move the speakers away from the TV set.
Rear L
Rear center
(for NS-P116)
Rear R
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Placing the subwoofer
It is recommended to place the subwoofer on the outside of
either the right or the left front speaker. (See fig. Å .) The
placement shown in fig. ı is also possible, however, if the
subwoofer system is placed directly facing the wall, the
bass effect may die because the sound from it and the
sound reflected by the wall may cancel out each other. To
prevent this from happening, face the subwoofer system at
an angle as shown in fig. Å.
Å
ı
Note
There may be a case that you cannot obtain enough super-
bass sounds from the subwoofer when listening in the
center of the room. This is because “standing waves” have
been developed between two parallel walls and they cancel
the bass sounds.
(
: Subwoofer,
: Front speaker)
In such a case, face the subwoofer obliquely to the wall. It
also may be necessary to break up the parallel surfaces by
placing bookshelves etc. along the walls.
Use the nonskid pads
Put the provided nonskid pads at the four corners on the
bottom of the subwoofer to prevent the subwoofer from
moving by vibrations etc.
Ⅵ Placing the center speaker
You can place the speaker on top of the TV if the top is flat,
on the floor under the TV, or inside the TV rack . Be sure to
place the speaker in a stable position.
When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the
speaker from falling, attach the provided fasteners at two
points on the bottom of the speaker and on the top of the
TV.
Screen
Notes
● Do not place the speaker on top of a TV whose area is
smaller than the bottom of the speaker. If placed, the
speaker may fall and cause injury.
● Do not place the speaker on top of a TV if the top is
inclined.
Fastener
● Do not touch the adhesive surface after peeling off
the seal as this will weaken its adhesive strength.
● Thoroughly wipe clean the surface where the fastener
is to be applied. Note that adhesive strength is
weakened if the surface is dirty, oily or wet and that
this may cause the center speaker to fall.
Peel off
the seal
E-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Mounting the front/rear speakers (and rear center speaker for
NS-P116)
Mount the front/rear speakers (and rear center speaker for
NS-P116) on a shelf, rack or directly on the floor, or hang
them on the wall.
Tapping screw
(Available at the
hardware store)
1
Diam. 3.5 to 4 mm
Holes
70 mm
70 mm
10 mm
To mount the speakers on a wall by
using the holes on the speakers’
back panels
Min.
20 mm
2
1 Fasten screws into a firm wall or wall support as shown
in the figure.
2 Hang the speaker by mounting the holes on the
protruding screws.
70 mm
* Make sure that the screws are securely affixed by the
narrow parts of the holes.
WARNING
● Each speaker weighs 0.9 kg (2 lbs.). Do not mount
them on thin plywood or a wall composed of a soft
surface material. If mounted, the screws may pull out
of the flimsy surface and the speakers may fall.This
may damage the speakers or cause personal injury.
● Do not affix the speakers to a wall using nails,
adhesives, or any other unstable hardware. Long-
term use and vibrations may cause the speakers to
fall.
Using the Yamaha Speaker Stand SPS-80 (option)
By using the Yamaha Speaker
Stand SPS-80, speakers can be
placed on the floor.
● To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose
speaker cables, fix the cables to the wall.
● Select an appropriate position on the wall to mount
the speaker so that no one will injure his/her head or
face.
SPS-80
* The SPS-80 is not available in some areas.
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Placing the the front/rear speakers (and rear center speaker for
NS-P116)
When placing the speakers on a flat surface, attach the
included nonskid pads to the corners on the bottom of the
speakers as shown on the left. This prevents the speakers
from sliding around.
Nonskid pad
* For NS-P116, the nonskid pads include four spare ones.
If you want to mount a speaker on a commercially available speaker stand
for the front/rear speakers (and rear center speaker for NS-P116)
The following optional accessories are needed for mounting the speakers on commercially available speaker stands.
* Inquire at your authorized YAMAHA dealer for the optional accessories.
Mounting bracket (AAX34790)
Screw (AAX12390)
<NS-P110>
<NS-P110>
X 4
X 4
<NS-P116>
<NS-P116>
X 5
X 5
1 Attach the bracket (AAX34790) to the bottom of the
speaker by using the screw (AAX12390) so that the
convex part of the bracket fits in the grooved part on
the bottom of the speaker as shown on the left.
Mounting
bracket
(AAX34790)
2 Mount the speaker on the speaker stand by using a
pair of screw holes (at an interval of 60 mm) on the
bracket.
* Those screw holes can be used with M4 screws
only.
Screw
(AAX12390)
60 mm
E-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Caution: Plug in the subwoofer and other audio/video components after all
connections are completed.
Ⅵ An example of basic connections
Rear speakers
Front speakers
Right
Left
Right
Left
Amplifier
SPEAKERS
FRONT
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
R
L
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
REAR
CENTER
Subwoofer
VOLUME
0
10
AUTO
STANDBY
INPUT
HIGH
LOW
OFF
/MONO
INPUT2
/MONO
POWER
ON
OFF
To AC outlet
Center speaker
Rear center speaker
(for NS-P116)
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Connect the front, center and rear speakers (and rear
center speaker for NS-P116) to the speaker output
terminals of your amplifier with the provided speaker
cables.
● Connect the subwoofer to the line output (pin jack)
terminal(s) of the amplifier.
* To connect with a YAMAHA DSP amplifier (or AV
receiver), connect the SUBWOOFER (or LOW PASS
etc.) terminal on the rear of the DSP amplifier (or AV
receiver) to the L/MONO INPUT terminal of the
subwoofer.
* The provided speaker cables have labels marked
FRONT L, FRONT R, CENTER, REAR L, REAR R
(and REAR C for NS-P116). Connect each speaker
cable to the corresponding speaker by following the
figure on page 7.
* To connect the subwoofer to the SPLIT SUBWOOFER
terminals on the rear of the DSP amplifier, connect
them to both the left L/MONO and right R INPUT
terminals of the subwoofer.
(The speaker cables marked FRONT L/R are used for
connecting the front speakers to the FRONT speakers’
terminals on the amplifier.)
* Connect each speaker making sure not to reverse the
polarity (+, –). If the speaker is connected with
reversed polarity, the sound will be unnatural and lack
bass.
Note
When connecting to a monaural line output terminal of the
amplifier, connect to the L/MONO INPUT terminal.
* For the front and rear speakers only, connect one
speaker to the left (marked L) terminals of your
amplifier, and another speaker to the right (marked R)
terminals.
Ⅵ How to connect speaker cables
For connections, keep the speaker cables as short as
possible. Do not bundle or roll up the excess part of the
cables. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard
from the speakers.
One side of the provided speaker cable has a white broken
line and the other side has no line.
Connect the (+) terminals on both the speaker and the
amplifier using the side with a white broken line. Connect
the (–) terminals on both components using the side with no
line.
Before connecting
Remove the insulation coating at the extremity of each
How to Connect:
speaker cable by twisting the coating off.
1 Press and hold the terminal’s tab, as shown in the
figure.
2 Insert the bare wire.
3 Release your finger from the tab to allow it to lock
securely on the cable’s wire end.
4 Test the firmness of the connection by pulling lightly on
the cable at the terminal.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
White broken line
Note
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other as
this could damage the speaker or the amplifier, or both
of them.
E-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE SUBWOOFER (SW-P130)
Ⅵ Controls and their functions
1
Port
Front panel
Rear panel
VOLUME
VOLUME
0
10
AUTO
STANDBY
HIGH
LOW
OFF
POWER
6
ON
INPUT
/MONO
0
10
2
OFF
AUTO
STANDBY
HIGH
LOW
OFF
4
POWER
INPUT
3
/MONO
5
ON
OFF
110V-120V
220V-240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
220V-240V
110V-120V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
1 Power indicator
4 AUTO STANDBY (HIGH/LOW/OFF) switch
This switch is originally set to the OFF position. By
setting this switch to the HIGH or LOW position, the
subwoofer’s automatic power-switching function
operates as explained on page 10. If you do not need
this function, set to the OFF position.
Lights up GREEN when the POWER switch (2) is
pressed in to the ON position and goes off when set to
the OFF position.
* Standby mode
If the POWER switch (2) is pressed in to the ON
position and the AUTO STANDBY switch (4) is set
to the HIGH or LOW position, this indicator lights up
RED when no signal is received by the subwoofer.
* Make sure to change the setting of this switch only
when the POWER switch (2) is in the OFF position.
5 INPUT terminals
2 POWER switch
Used to input line level signals from the amplifier.
Press this switch to the ON position to turn on the
power of the subwoofer. When the power of the
subwoofer is on, the power indicator (1) on the front
panel lights up GREEN. Press this switch again to set
to the OFF position to turn off the power of the
subwoofer.
6 VOLUME control
Adjusts the volume level. Turn the control clockwise to
increase the volume, and counterclockwise to
decrease the volume.
3 VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch
(For China, Korean and General models)
If the preset setting of the switch is incorrect, set the
switch to the proper voltage range (220V-240V or
110V-120V) of your area.
Consult your dealer if you are unsure of the correct
setting.
WARNING
Be sure to unplug the subwoofer before setting the
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch correctly.
E-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Automatic power-switching function
If the source being played is stopped and the input signal is
cut off for 7 to 8 minutes, the subwoofer automatically
switches to the standby mode. (When the subwoofer
switches to the standby mode by the automatic power-
switching function, the power indicator lights up in red.)
When you play a source again, the power of the subwoofer
turns on automatically by sensing audio signals input to the
subwoofer.
This function will operate by sensing a certain level of low
frequency input signal. Usually set the AUTO STANDBY
switch to the LOW position. However, if the power is not
switched on or to the standby mode smoothly, set the switch
to the HIGH position. In the HIGH position, the power will
turn on even with a low level of input signal. But please be
aware that the subwoofer may not switch to the standby
mode when there is an extremely low input signal.
* The power might turn on unexpectedly by sensing noise
from other appliances. If that occurs, set the AUTO
STANDBY switch to the OFF position and use the
POWER switch to switch the power between ON and
OFF manually.
* This function detects the low-frequency components
below 200 Hz of the input signals (i.e., the explosion in
the action movie, the sound of the bass guitar or the bass
drum, etc.).
* The minutes required to switch the subwoofer to the
standby mode might change by sensing noise from other
appliances.
This function is available only when the power of the
subwoofer is on (by pressing the POWER switch).
Ⅵ Adjusting the subwoofer before use
Before using the subwoofer, adjust the subwoofer to obtain the optimum volume balance between the subwoofer and the front
speakers by following the procedures described below.
Rear panel
VOLUME
0
10
VOLUME
AUTO
STANDBY
HIGH
LOW
OFF
INPUT
/MONO
1, 5
0
10
AUTO
STANDBY
HIGH
LOW
OFF
POWER
POWER
ON
ON
INPUT
/MONO
OFF
3
OFF
E-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Once the volume balance between the subwoofer and
the front speakers is adjusted, you can adjust the
volume of your whole sound system by using the
amplifier’s volume control.
1 Set the VOLUME control to minimum (0).
2 Turn on the power of all the other
components.
However, if you change the front speakers (NX-E130)
to others, you must make this adjustment again.
● For adjusting the VOLUME control, refer to
“Frequency characteristics” below.
3 Press the POWER switch to the ON position.
*
The power indicator on the front panel lights
up in green.
4 Play a source containing low-frequency
components and adjust the amplifier’s
volume control to the desired listening level.
5 Increase the volume gradually to adjust the
volume balance between the subwoofer and
the front speakers.
Normally, set the control to the level where you
can obtain a little more bass effect than when
this unit is not used.
Ⅵ Frequency characteristics
Fig. 1 shows the frequency characteristics of the subwoofer.
Fig. 2 shows the frequency characteristics when the
subwoofer is combined with NX-E130 and the subwoofer’s
volume level is set to the figured position.
100 dB
100 dB
90
90
80
70
60
VOLUME
80
70
SW-P130
60
0
I0
NX-E130
50
40
50
40
20
50
100
200
500 Hz
20
50
100
200
500 Hz
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
E-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCEDYAMAHA ACTIVE SERVO TECHNOLOGY
(for SW-P130)
The theory of Yamaha Active Servo Technology has been
based upon two major factors, the Helmholtz resonator and
negative-impedance drive. Active Servo Processing
speakers reproduce the bass frequencies through an “air
woofer”, which is a port or opening in the speaker’s cabinet.
This opening is used instead of, and performs the functions
of, a woofer in a conventionally designed speaker system.
Thus, signals of low amplitude within the cabinet can,
according to the Helmholtz resonance theory, be outputted
from this opening as waves of great amplitude if the size of
the opening and the volume of the cabinet are in the correct
proportion to satisfy a certain ratio.
By employing negative-impedance drive circuits, the
amplifier is able to generate precise, low-amplitude, low-
frequency waves with superior damping characteristics.
These waves are then radiated from the cabinet opening as
high-amplitude signals. The system can, therefore, by
employing the negative-impedance output drive amplifier
and a speaker cabinet with the Helmholtz resonator,
reproduce an extremely wide range of frequencies with
amazing sound quality and less distortion.
The features described above, then, are combined to be the
fundamental structure of the conventional Yamaha Active
Servo Technology.
In order to accomplish this, moreover, the amplitudes within
the cabinet must be both precise and of sufficient power
because these amplitudes must overcome the “load”
presented by the air that exists within the cabinet.
Our new Active Servo Technology — Advanced Yamaha
Active Servo Technology — adopted Advanced Negative
Impedance Converter (ANIC) circuits, which allows the
conventional negative impedance converter to dynamically
vary in order to select an optimum value for speaker
impedance variation. With this new ANIC circuits, Advanced
Yamaha Active Servo Technology can provide more stable
performance and improved sound pressure compared with
the conventional Yamaha Active Servo Technology, resulting
in more natural and dynamic bass reproduction.
Thus it is this problem that is resolved through the
employment of a new design in which the amplifier supplies
special signals. If the electrical resistance of the voice coil
could be reduced to zero, the movement of the speaker unit
would become linear with respect to signal voltage. To
accomplish this, a special negative-impedance output-drive
amplifier for subtracting output impedance of the amplifier is
used.
Cabinet
Air woofer
(Helmholtz resonator)
High-amplitude
Port
bass sound
Advanced Negative-
impedance Converter
Active Servo
Processing
Amplifier
Signals
Signals of low amplitude
E-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if
the instructions given below do not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service
center.
Problem
Cause
What to Do
No sound.
Speaker cables are not connected
securely.
Connect them securely.
Sound level is too low.
Speaker cables are not connected
correctly.
Connect them correctly, that is L (left) to
L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”.
For SW-P130
Problem
Cause
What to Do
Power is not supplied even
though the POWER switch is set
to the ON position.
The power plug is not securely
connected.
Connect it securely.
No sound.
The VOLUME control is set to 0.
Turn the VOLUME control to the right
(clockwise).
Speaker cables are not connected
securely.
Connect them securely.
Sound level is too low.
Speaker cables are not connected
correctly.
Connect them correctly, that is L (left) to
L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”.
A source sound with few bass
frequencies is played.
Play a source sound with bass
frequencies.
It is influenced by standing waves.
Reposition the subwoofer or break up
the parallel surface by placing
bookshelves etc. along the walls.
The subwoofer does not turn on
automatically.
The POWER switch is set to the OFF
position.
Set the POWER switch to the ON
position.
The AUTO STANDBY switch is set to
the OFF position.
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the
“HIGH” or “LOW” position.
The level of input signal is too low.
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the
“HIGH” position.
The subwoofer does not turn into
the standby mode automatically.
There is an influence of noise
generated from external appliances etc.
Move the subwoofer farther away from
such appliances and/or reposition the
connected speaker cables.
Otherwise, set the AUTO STANDBY
switch to the “OFF” position.
The AUTO STANDBY switch is set to
the OFF position.
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the
“HIGH” position.
The subwoofer turns into the
standby mode unexpectedly.
The level of input signal is too low.
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the
“HIGH” position.
There is an influence of noise
generated from external appliances etc.
The subwoofer turns on
unexpectedly.
Move the subwoofer farther away from
such appliances and/or reposition the
connected speaker cables.
Otherwise, set the AUTO STANDBY
switch to the “OFF” position.
E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Ⅵ NX-E130, NX-C130
Ⅵ SW-P130
Type ......... Full range acoustic-suspension speaker system
Type ............... Advanced Yamaha Active Servo Technology
Magnetic shielding type
Magnetic shielding type
Driver ........................ 5 cm (2”) full range cone speaker x 2
Nominal Input Power ................................................. 30W
Maximum Input Power ............................................. 100W
Impedance ..................................................................... 6Ω
Driver ....................................... 16 cm (6-1/2”) cone woofer
Amplifier Output
U.S.A. and Canada models .............................. 55 W/5Ω
Other models .................................................... 50 W/5Ω
Dynamic Power ................................................. 100 W/5Ω
Frequency Response ............................... 30 Hz to 200 Hz
Frequency Response
<NX-E130>........................................... 100 Hz to 25 kHz
<NX-C130> ............................................ 80 Hz to 25 kHz
Power Supply
U.S.A. and Canada models ................... AC 120V, 60 Hz
U.K. and Europe models ....................... AC 230V, 50 Hz
Australia model...................................... AC 240V, 50 Hz
China, Korean and General models
Sensitivity ...................................................86 dB/2.83V/m
Dimensions (W x H x D)
<NX-E130>.......................... 72 mm x 164 mm x 111 mm
(2-13/16” x 6-7/16” x 4-3/8”)
....................................... AC 110-120/220-240V, 50/60 Hz
<NX-C130> ......................... 300 mm x 72 mm x 110 mm
(11-13/16” x 2-13/16”x 4-5/16”)
Power Consumption ................................................. 60 W
(In the standby mode: 0.8 W)
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) ...... 200 mm x 365 mm x 375 mm
<NX-E130>................................................. 0.9 kg (2 lbs.)
<NX-C130> ....................................... 1.1 kg (2 lbs. 7 oz.)
(7-7/8” x 14-7/20” x 14-3/4”)
Weight .............................................. 8.5 kg (18 lbs. 11 oz.)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice due to
product improvements.
E-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2005
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
J
A
WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
Printed in China
WF51940
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
RX-V459DAB
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at
least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20
cm on the back of this unit.
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping
or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this
unit in the standby mode, and then disconnect the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
3
4
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is
designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
5
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
–
–
–
other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
7
8
9
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit
during a lightning storm.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power
cable plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND.....................39
INTRODUCTION
Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround........... 39
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 40
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 41
RECORDING........................................................42
FM/AM TUNING..................................................43
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 43
Manual tuning.......................................................... 44
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 45
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 46
Selecting preset stations........................................... 47
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 48
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING.....................50
Selecting the Radio Data System program.............. 50
Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 51
Displaying the Radio Data System information...... 52
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
TUNING.............................................................54
Preparing the DAB tuning ....................................... 55
DAB tuning.............................................................. 56
DAB preset tuning................................................... 57
Selecting preset DAB services................................. 58
DAB service information......................................... 59
Using DAB MENU ................................................. 61
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories.................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Front panel display .................................................... 8
Rear panel................................................................ 10
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 11
Placing speakers....................................................... 11
Connecting speakers................................................ 12
Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 14
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 15
Connecting a TV...................................................... 16
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,
a VCR or an STB................................................. 17
Connecting a CD player, an MD player
or a tape deck...................................................... 19
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ......................................... 20
Connecting a game console, a video camera
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................66
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 66
Sound field program descriptions............................ 67
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 69
Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 75
or a portable audio player.................................... 20
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 21
Connecting the DAB antenna.................................. 22
Connecting the power cable..................................... 23
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 24
Turning on this unit
and setting it to the standby mode....................... 25
BASIC SETUP...................................................... 26
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU............................................................78
Using SET MENU................................................... 80
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 82
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85
3 DAB MENU......................................................... 86
4 OPTION MENU................................................... 87
ADVANCED SETUP............................................88
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................90
Controlling this unit, a TV,
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 29
USING OTHER FEATURES.............................. 31
Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 31
Muting the audio output........................................... 31
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 31
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 32
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 33
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 34
Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 35
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 36
Enjoying multi-channel sources
or other components ............................................ 90
Setting remote control codes ................................... 92
RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................93
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 36
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 36
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 37
Displaying the input source information ................. 37
Playing video sources in the background ................ 38
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................94
GLOSSARY...........................................................99
Audio information ................................................... 99
Video information.................................................. 101
Sound field program information .......................... 101
DAB frequency information.................................. 102
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................103
1 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
FEATURES
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 90 W + 90 W
Radio Data System
◆ Radio Data System tuning capability
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
◆ DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) tuning capability
◆ DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) information display
Center: 90 W
Surround: 90 W + 90 W
Surround back: 90 W
◆
Initial scan function to locate all DAB services in your area
◆ Tuning aid function to optimize DAB reception
Sound field features
Other features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
sound fields
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR
OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
◆ PORTABLE mini analog input jack on the front panel
for a portable audio player
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
™
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the
sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the
MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Notes
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
CORPORATION.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
The “DAB Digital Radio” logo and the stylised “r” mark ® and ©
Digital One Limited.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.
This receiver supports DAB tuning.
2 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
AM loop antenna
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
DTV/CBL
VCR
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
Indoor FM antenna
Indoor DAB antenna
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
5
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
7
DIRECT ST.
8
SPEAKERS
9
ENHANCER
0
NIGHT STRAIGHT
10
ENT.
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
Installing batteries in the remote control
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the
operation range of the remote control.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
2
1
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
3
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote
control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the
memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote
control code and program any acquired functions that may have
been cleared.
1
2
Press the
compartment cover off.
part and slide the battery
Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,
UM-3) according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
3 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1
2
8
0
3
4
5
6
7
9
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
B
A
C D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1 STANDBY/ON
5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 25).
•
•
•
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
Selects the DAB service on top of the list when this
unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 57).
Selects the speaker channel whose output level you
want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the
Notes
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
6 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/–
•
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when this unit is in the FM/AM tuning mode. The
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 47).
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 7).
3 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT, SEARCH MODE
•
•
FM/AM tuning mode. The colon (:) is not displayed in
the front panel display (see page 44).
services when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
(see page 57).
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input
source (see page 34).
•
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode.
•
•
Edits the assignments of preset stations when this unit
is in the FM/AM tuning mode (see page 47).
this unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 56).
4 FM/AM, DAB
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Switches the reception band between FM, AM and DAB
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (See
page 43 and 56).
•
Stores a preset station in the memory when this unit is
in the FM/AM tuning mode. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning
(see page 45).
•
Stores a preset DAB service in the memory when this
unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 57).
4 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 Front panel display
I MULTI CH INPUT
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 8).
Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks (see page 36).
9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY
Note
•
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO
indicator is turned off) when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode (see page 43).
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
•
Displays various information about the DAB service
currently being broadcast when this unit is in the DAB
tuning mode (see page 59).
J VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console, a video camera or a
portable audio player (see page 20).
0 VOLUME
y
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
Note
A
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority
over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 31).
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
B SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When
“STRAIGHT” is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel
input signals are output directly from their respective
speakers without effect processing (see page 36).
D TONE CONTROL
Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the total balance
BASS/TREBLE +/– buttons (see page 30).
E BASS/TREBLE +/–
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right
speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see
page 30).
F PROGRAM l / h
Selects sound field programs (see page 66).
G INPUT MODE
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input
signals and select the corresponding input signals when
one component is connected via both digital and analog
connections (see page 32).
H INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
5 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 90.
■ Controlling this unit
Press AMP to control this unit.
1 Infrared signal transmitter
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim the transmitter at the
component you want to operate (see page 7).
1
2 Input selector buttons
Select the input source.
9
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
0
3 Sound field program selector buttons
– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 40).
– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-
channel playback of multi-channel sources (see
page 39).
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
2
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
A
DISC SKIP
B
C
SLEEP
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in
hi-fi stereo sound (see page 37).
D
E
F
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
4 SPEAKERS
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
G
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
1
2
3
4
3
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
A on
B on
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
H
I
4
5
ENT.
9
0
10
A and B off
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
6
5 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 35).
SRCH MODE
J
K
ENTER
7
8
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DISPLAY
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
6 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted (see page 34).
7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
8 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
9 STANDBY
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 25).
0 POWER
Turns on this unit (see page 25).
A MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 36).
B CODE SET
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 92).
C SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 33).
6 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
D AMP
E Radio Data System tuning buttons
Sets the remote control to the operation mode of this unit.
FREQ/TEXT
F VOLUME +/–
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
Switches the Radio Data System display between the
PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the
station offers the corresponding data services) and the
frequency display (see page 52).
Note
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
PTY SEEK MODE
Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 50).
G MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 31).
PTY SEEK START
Starts searching for a station once the desired program
type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 51).
H STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When
“STRAIGHT” is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel
input signals are output directly from their respective
speakers without effect processing (see page 36).
EON
Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or
SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 52).
J SRCH MODE
Switches between the five DAB tuning methods when this
unit is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 56).
I NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 31).
J SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 80).
K DISPLAY
Displays various information of the service currently
being broadcast when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
(see page 59).
■ Controlling the TUNER (FM/AM and
DAB) functions
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
345Numeric buttons
•
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when
Select preset DAB services when this unit is in the
DAB tuning mode (see page 58).
•
VOLUME
6 BAND
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
S
E
A
R
C
H
M
O
D
DAB
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
Switches the reception band between FM, AM and DAB
(see page 43).
INPUT
AIGHT
CT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
TONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
7 A/B/C/D/E j / i, PRESET/CH u / d
Approximately 6 m
•
Press A/B/C/D/E j / i to select a preset station group
station number (1 to 8) when this unit is in the FM/AM
tuning mode (see page 47).
30
30
•
when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode
(see page 58).
8 DAB MEMORY
Notes
Stores a preset DAB service in the memory when this unit
is in the DAB tuning mode (see page 57).
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
7 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C D
96
24
t
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY
DAB SECONDARY DRC PRESET
PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP
MATRIX DISCRETE
ENHANCER
VIRTUAL
STANDARD
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
SP
HiFi DSP
A B
MUTE
96/24
DUAL
LFE
L C R
q EX qDIGITAL
q PL x q PL
PCM
ft
q PL
mS
dB
SL SB SR
E
F
H
I
J
K
M
N O
P
Q
G
1 Decoder indicators
0 STEREO indicator
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
•
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for
an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit
(see page 43).
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo DAB
service.
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 35).
•
A MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 45).
3 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
B DAB indicators
Indicate the current DAB tuning status when this unit is in
the DAB tuning mode (see pages 56 to 65).
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
Surround right
DSP sound field
Indicates the current volume level.
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
D DUAL indicator
Lights up when dual monaural signals are being input to
this unit when this unit is in the DAB tuning mode.
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 41).
E PCM indicator
Modulation) digital audio signals.
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
F STANDARD indicator
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or
“SUR. ENHANCED” programs are selected (see
page 40).
6 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 31).
G SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
7 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program (see page 67).
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 31).
8 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode
(see page 43).
I NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 31).
9 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 43).
J HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 67).
8 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
K Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
L Radio Data System indicators
Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being
received.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
M SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 33).
N MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 31).
O 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
P Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal (see page 27).
Q LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
9 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUT
OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
CENTER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
PB
DVR
PB
Y
PR
Y
PR
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
SUB
WOOFER
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
SURROUND
CD
FRONT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
DAB
DTV/CBL
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
TUNER
SPEAKERS
FM ANT
75Ω
FRONT
SURROUND
AM
ANT
GND
UNBAL.
AC OUTLET
A
B
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
9
0
7
8
1 Video component jacks
6 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
2 Audio component jacks
7 Antenna terminals
See page 21 for connection information.
3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
8 Speaker terminals
See page 12 for connection information.
4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
9 DAB antenna terminal
See page 13 for connection information.
See page 22 for connection information.
5 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
0 AC OUTLET
See pages 17 and 18 for connection information.
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual
components.
See page 23 for details.
10 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
*
Front speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Center speaker (C)
FL
FR
C
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
30˚
SL
SL
SR
SR
60˚
80˚
Surround speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the
floor.
SB
Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
FR
SL
SW
FL
SR
C
Subwoofer (SW)
SB
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi
stereo reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The
position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
1.8 m
11 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
•
•
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is in the standby mode (see page 25).
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
•
•
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see
page 24). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 89).
Notes
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 82) are directed
to the speakers selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 82).
Front speakers (A)
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Left
1
2
4
5
7
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
A
B
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
3
6
Front
speakers (B)
Center
speaker
Surround back
speaker
12 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
■ Connecting the speaker cable
Connect one or two front speaker systems (1, 2) to these
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.
1
Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
10 mm
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System) to this jack.
2
Loosen the knob.
1
7
4
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
2
3
5
6
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
Speaker layout
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
13 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Audio jacks and cables
Video jacks and cables
AUDIO
PORTABLE
DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
L
R
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
(Yellow)
(Green)
(Blue) (Red)
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
S
O
V
PB
PR
Y
L
R
C
M
Left and right
analog audio
cable plug
Stereo
analog
audio
minicable
plug
Coaxial
Optical
digital
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plug
digital audio
cable plug audio cable
plug
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
This unit has four types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
VIDEO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
PORTABLE jack
For analog audio signals transmitted via stereo analog
audio mini cables.
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
Notes
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
14 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)
Output
AUDIO OUT (REC)
Input
L
R
L
R
Analog audio
AUDIO
PORTABLE
Analog output
Note
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Y
P
B
PR
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Analog video
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Through
15 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a TV
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
S
S-video in
V
Y
PB
PR
Video in
Component video in
TV
16 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB
Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those
made for your TV (see page 16). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Notes
• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 16). For example, if you connected your TV
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the
corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL IN” in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 85).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
DVD
PB
Y
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
S
Y
PB
V
PR
O
R
L
C
Optical audio out
S-Video out
Audio out
Coaxial audio out
Component video out
Video out
DVD Player
17 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR
AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
DVR
DVR
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S
S
V
V
Y
PB
PR
R
L
R
L
S-video out
Audio in
S-video in
Video in
Video out
Audio out
Component video out
DVD recorder or
VCR
■ Connecting an STB
Cable TV receiver or
satellite receiver
Audio out
Component video out
Video out
Optical audio out
S-video out
R
L
O
V
Y
PB
PR
S
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DTV/CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
S VIDEO
18 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog connection.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
CD Player
Audio out
R
L
*1
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/
CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
R
L
R
L
Audio in
Audio out
MD recorder
or tape deck
Note
*1 To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the
corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL IN” in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 85).
19 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder
Connecting a game console,
a video camera or a portable audio
player
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to
this unit.
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-
format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output
jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
CAUTION
Note
The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority
over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.
Do not connect this unit or other components to
the AC power supply until all connections
between components are complete.
VOLUME
Notes
STANDBY
/ON
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 36), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker
system before using this feature.
VIDEO AUX
M
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the
front left and right channels.
V
L
R
Audio
out
Audio out
Video out
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
Game console or
video camera
Portable audio
player
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
L
R
L
R
Front out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Multi-format player or
external decoder
20 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to
designated terminals.
2
3
Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Indoor FM antenna
(supplied)
TUNER
FM ANT
AM
ANT
75Ω
GND
UNBAL.
4
5
Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back
into place.
Ground
For maximum safety and
minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground
is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) of
vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors
from a window.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
Set up the AM loop antenna.
1
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception
when you tune into AM stations (see page 43).
21 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the DAB antenna
Connect the supplied indoor DAB antenna to the DAB
antenna terminal on the rear panel and attach the indoor
DAB antenna vertically on the wall.
DAB
Indoor DAB antenna
(supplied)
y
It is recommended that you use the tuning aid function (see
page 63) when you set up the indoor DAB antenna in order to
maximize DAB reception capability.
Notes
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all
areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB
statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org/”.
• If the DAB signal is weak, use a commercially available
outdoor DAB antenna for better reception.
22 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the power cable
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
AC OUTLET
To the AC wall outlet
AC OUTLET (SWITCHED)
Memory back-up
Use this outlet to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of another
when this unit is turned on. However, power to this outlet
is cut off when this unit is in the standby mode or the
power cable of this unit is disconnected from the AC wall
outlet. For information on the maximum power, see
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 103.
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
23 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
3
4
5
Press PROGRAM l / h buttons on the front
panel to select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit.
l
PROGRAM
h
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
SP IMP.-8 MIN
2,5
3
2,4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
1
Make sure this unit is in the standby mode.
See page 25 for details about turning on this unit or
standby mode.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
While holding
SP IMP.-6 MIN
down
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
save the new setting and set this unit to the
standby mode.
STANDBY
/ON
Note
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
24 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Turning on this unit and setting it to the standby mode
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
POWER
VOLUME
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
/ON
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
■ Turning on the power
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
■ Setting this unit to the standby mode
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again (or
STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit
to the standby mode.
POWER on the remote control) to turn on this
unit.
g
STANDBY
POWER
STANDBY
/ON
STANDBY
/ON
or
or
Front panel
Remote control
Front panel
Remote control
25 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC SETUP
BASIC SETUP
Notes
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU”
(see page 82).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 82).
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
PTY SEEK
START
1
3
Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
ENTER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
2,12
3-11
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
The “ROOM” appears in the front panel display.
1
2
Press AMP on the remote control.
4
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
AMP
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
ROOM: S >M L
SET MENU
MENU
.
BASIC SETUP
SRCH MODE
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
Choices: S, M, L
2
S (small)
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
3.6 x 2.8m, 10m
2
2
26 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC SETUP
5
Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
j / i to select the desired setting.
7
Press d to select “SET” and then j / i to
select the desired setting.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
..
SUBWOOFER YES
>SET CANCEL
Choices: YES, NONE
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to apply the settings you made.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
6
Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i
to select the number of speakers connected
to this unit.
You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup
procedure.
8
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs
a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears
in the front panel display for a few seconds and then
“CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display.
..
SPEAKERS 6spk
Choice Display
L C R
Speakers
CHECK:TestTone
Front L/R
2spk
y
SL SB SR
Check the speaker connections (see page 12) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.
L C R
SL SB SR
Front L/R, Center
3spk
L C R
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
SL SB SR
L C R
SL SB SR
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
L C R
SL SB SR
6spk
27 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC SETUP
9
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
11 Press d / u to select a speaker and then j / i
to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
• Press i to increase the value.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
• Press j to decrease the value.
PRESET/CH
..
CHECK OK? YES
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Choices: YES, NO
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu to balance the output level of
each speaker.
FR ----||----
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
10 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
ENTER
• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround back speakers.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top “SET MENU” display.
• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker
level adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
12 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC
SETUP”.
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
28 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
INPUT
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
or
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
2
2
6
6 7
3
5
Front panel
Remote control
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
REC
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
3
MULTI CH IN
CODE SET
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
SLEEP
Available input sources
EON
AMP
2
5
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
A
MUTE
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
L
R
2
3
4
7
DVD AUTO
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
Currently selected
input mode
Currently selected
input source
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Note
If you are to select an input source connected via digital
connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”
(see page 32).
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or press AMP and then press SPEAKERS on
the remote control repeatedly).
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B on the front
panel, the respective speakers are turned on or off.
4
Start playback on the selected source
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
SPEAKERS
A
B
• See page 43 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
• See page 56 for details about DAB tuning
instructions.
Front panel
or
AMP
SPEAKERS
9
Remote control
29 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLAYBACK
5
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
7
Press PROGRAM l / h buttons on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
VOLUME
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display.
+
or
VOLUME
–
See page 67 for details about sound field programs.
l
PROGRAM
h
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
or
6
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”
and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– buttons to
adjust the corresponding frequency
response level.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT S
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
Remote control
BASS/TREBLE
TONE CONTROL
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
R
TV Sports
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
Currently selected sound
field program
L
R
TREBLE
0dB
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
Notes
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency
response.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
selected as the input source (see page 36).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound
field programs are applied.
• To display information about the currently selected input
source in the front panel display, see page 37 for details.
Notes
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored
independently.
• When “TC.BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 84), and
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this
unit.
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front left
and right speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” mode (see page 37) is selected or when
“MULTI CH INPUT” (see page 36) is selected as the
input source.
• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 39
for details.
30 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
USING OTHER FEATURES
Using SILENT CINEMA
Selecting the night listening mode
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 67). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1
Press AMP and then press NIGHT on the
remote control repeatedly to select
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Notes
NIGHT
AMP
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when “MULTI CH
INPUT” is selected as the input source (see page 36).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” (see page 37) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 36) is
selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see
page 36).
10
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
Muting the audio output
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
MUTE
2
Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYP.”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 84).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
31 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
Press INPUT MODE on the front panel
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.
Notes
INPUT MODE
cases:
– when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 37) is
selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 36).
Available input sources
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
A
L
R
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input mode
Currently selected
input source
Selecting the input mode
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
y
2) Analog signals
You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 85).
DTS
Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
Notes
ANALOG
• To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs, (when using a digital
audio connection), be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding depending
on the player even if you make a digital connection between this
unit and the player.
Notes
• When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected.
• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in
most cases.
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
to select the desired input source.
INPUT
32 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET (see page 23).
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
SLEEP
L
R
SLEEP 120min
Flashes
1
Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
SLEEP
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
L
R
STRAIGHT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
Lights up
2
3
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
4
To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP
OFF” appears in the front panel display.
See page 43 for details about tuning instructions.
SLEEP
Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER pCD
VOLUME
dB
SP
SLEEP
A
L
R
SLEEP OFF
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP 90min
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the
front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min
33 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
2
Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
speaker output level.
• Press i to increase the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 26) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 83).
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
1
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
y
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust
and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output
level.
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
1
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
2
1
Press AMP and then press LEVEL on the
remote control repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
AMP
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker
output level.
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker
output level.
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker
output level.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker
output level.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output
level.
y
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also
select the speaker by pressing u / d.
34 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
1
Press AMP and then press ENHANCER on
the remote control repeatedly to select the
desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
The following display is shown in the front panel
display and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of the high-frequency fidelity
as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency
bass is compensated, providing the improved performance
of the overall sound system.
ENHANCER
AMP
0
Lights up
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
ENHANCER
A
Notes
L
R
Music Enh. 2ch
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the
PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog
2-channel input sources.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
Choices: Music Enh. 2ch, Music Enh. 6ch,
Off (previously selected sound field
program)
• Select “Music Enh. 2ch” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “Music Enh. 6ch” to play back compression
artifacts in 6-channel stereo.
• Select Off (previously selected sound field
program) to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display.
• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in
2-channel or 6-channel stereo.
y
y
You can also switch between “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music
Enh. 6ch” by pressing j / i on the remote control when
either one of them is displayed in the front panel display.
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.
2
Press d once and then j / i on the remote
control to select the desired effect level.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
ENHANCER
A
L
R
LOW >HIGH
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Note
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
35 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 20) as the input
source.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel
display.
1
Press AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the
remote control to select “STRAIGHT”.
MULTI CH
INPUT
AMP
MULTI CH IN
STRAIGHT
or
ENT.
Front panel
Remote control
MULTI CH INPUT
STRAIGHT
Note
2
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front
panel display.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the
front panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
You can also select “STRAIGHT” by pressing STRAIGHT
(EFFECT) on the front panel.
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Press AMP and then press STEREO on the
remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
STEREO
AMP
1
2ch Stereo
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “BASS OUT”
is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 82).
• You can also select “2ch Stereo” by pressing the
PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel.
36 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass
the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you
can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and
analog sources.
Displaying the input source
information
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate, and flag data of the current input signal.
Press AMP on the remote control and then press
DIRECT ST. on the remote control to select
“DIRECT STEREO”.
1
Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the desired input source.
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
DIRECT ST.
AMP
8
2
Press AMP on the remote control and then
press STRAIGHT on the remote control to
select “STRAIGHT”.
DIRECT STEREO
STRAIGHT
AMP
ENT.
Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 32),
no sound will be output.
STRAIGHT
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• “TONE CONTROL” (see page 30) and “SOUND MENU” (see
page 82) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not
effective.
3
Press u/ dto display the information about
the input signal.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
y
You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing
the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel repeatedly.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
37 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING OTHER FEATURES
The following information appears in the front panel
display for a few seconds.
Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Signal format
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Display status: Analog, Digital, Dolby Digital, DTS,
PCM, Unknwn Digital
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
Note
“Unknwn Digital” appears when this unit detects any
undecodable digital signal.
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
Audio sources
Video sources
Channel in:
DVD
TV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
Note
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select “MULTI CH
INPUT” as the input source (see page 36).
Sampling frequency fs:
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz
Bit rate rate:
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Flag flg:
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals. Some flag data cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders.
y
When you are displaying information about the input source, this
unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 36). To turn back the
sound effect on, press “STRAIGHT” again.
38 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Decoders
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
surround
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoders.
Decoder
Functions
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX or DTS-ES decoder.
1
Press AMP on the remote control and then
press EXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-
channel playback.
EX/ES
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX decoder.
EXTD SUR.
AMP
7
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
Notes
2
Press j/ irepeatedly to select a decoder
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually
from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD
SUR. in the following cases:
– when “SUR. LR” (see page 82) or “SUR. B” (see page 82) is
set to “NONE”.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
being played.
Auto AUTO
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when “2ch Stereo” (see page 36) or “DIRECT STEREO” (see
page 37) program is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set
to “NONE” (see page 82).
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1
channels.
39 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Enjoying 2-channel sources in
surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
SUR. STANDARD
Functions
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
1
Press AMP and then press STANDARD on
the remote control repeatedly to switch
between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR.
ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to
select the “MOVIE THEATER” programs.
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
STANDARD
5
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
music sources
AMP
or
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
game sources
MOVIE
4
DTS processing for movie sources
DTS processing for music sources
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
2
Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
or
Functions
SELECT
MOVIE THEATER
6
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PRO LOGIC
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Movie
y
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
Neo:6 Cinema
You can also select a decoder by pressing j/ ion the remote
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
DTS processing for movie sources
Note
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set
to “NONE” (see page 82).
40 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 82), Virtual
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 67).
Note
set to “NONE” (see page 82) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 36).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 37) or “2ch Stereo”
mode (see page 36) is selected, or when this unit is in the
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 36).
41 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECORDING
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
Notes
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of the TONE CONTROL (see page 30), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 83) and the sound field programs
(see page 66) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
INPUT
2
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
or
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
Front panel
Remote control
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
2
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
3
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Start recording on the recording component.
42 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM TUNING
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Note
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
Orient the connected FM and AM antenna for the best reception.
Automatic tuning
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
AUTO/MAN'L
2
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
SP
VOLUME
A
L
R
STANDBY
/ON
A AM 1440 kHz
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
No colon (:)
Lights up
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
3
4
1 3
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ honce to begin
automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
INPUT
Front panel
• Press hto tune into a higher frequency.
• Press lto tune into a lower frequency.
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
LEVEL
FM/AM
DAB
or
FM
AM
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
SP
A
L
R
A AM 1530 kHz
Lights up
43 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
Manual tuning
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
TUNING MODE
Note
DISPLAY
AUTO/MAN'L
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
2
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
VOLUME
A
L
R
STANDBY
/ON
A AM 1440 kHz
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
No colon (:)
Disappears
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
3
4
1 3
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hto tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
LEVEL
Front panel
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
or
DAB
FM
AM
44 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic preset tuning
3
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset station number and the MEMORY and
AUTO indicators flash. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
MEMORY
3
2
MAN'L/AUTO FM
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
Flash
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
AUTO TUNED
SP
A
L
R
A1:FM 87.50MHz
Flashes
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
1
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning
options” on page 46.
INPUT
Notes
Front panel
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
searching for all the available stations.
Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” (see page 46).
FM/AM
DAB
FM
45 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
■ Automatic preset tuning options
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
Note
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on
page 45.
2,5
3
VOLUME
•
Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING
l/ hto select the preset station number
under which the first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all
been stored up to E8.
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
DISPLA
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
Y
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
4
NEXT
1
Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 43 and 44 for tuning instructions.
•
Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)
disappears from the front panel display and
then press PRESET/TUNING lto begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
A AM 630 kHz
EDIT
LEVEL
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the station received.
2
3
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
MEMORY
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
Flashes
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset station
group
Colon (:)
46 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
Selecting preset stations
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hto select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press hto select a higher preset station number.
• Press lto select a lower preset station number.
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
LEVEL
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
Flashes
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
1
2
C3:AM 630 kHz
LEVEL
SET MENU
Preset station number
TITLE
BAND
MENU
SRCH MODE
ENTER
2
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
5
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
1
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, press
TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or
A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select
the desired preset station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
A/B/C/D/E
L
R
ENTER
or
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
6
Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
47 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
2
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
2,4
VOLUME
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
or
STANDBY
/ON
ENTER
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
PRESET/CH
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
Remote control
Front panel
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
TUNED
CD
VOLUME
dB
1
2
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l/ h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 47.
SP
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.50MHz
y
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
Flashes
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.50MHz
Flashes
48 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
3
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l/ h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 47.
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
NEXT
Flashes
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
A5:FM 90.60MHz
Flashes
4
Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
SP
A
L
R
EDIT E1-A5
49 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System
function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS
(program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when
receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Selecting the Radio Data System
program
Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System
program types and search for all the available preset
stations of the selected program type.
3
Press PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
4
ENTER
TV
AV
POP M
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
5
7
8
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
1
SRCH MODE
Lights up
3
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
4
2
Program type
Descriptions
PTY SEEK
START
News
NEWS
1
2
Press TUNER on the remote control and then
press BAND to select “FM” as the reception
band.
Current affairs
General information
Sports
AFFAIRS
INFO
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
SPORT
TUNER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
FM
Education
EDUCATE
DRAMA
Drama
Culture
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
POP M
Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
Science
Light entertainment
Popular music
Rock music
ROCK M
NEWS
Middle-of-the-road music (easy-
listening)
M.O.R. M
MODE
PTY SEEK
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
Flashes
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE
on the remote control again.
50 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Using the Radio Data System
station network
4
Press PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
PTY SEEK
START
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the national station once the EON data service ends.
PTY HOLD
POP M
Notes
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
Flashes
Lights up
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
y
To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on
the remote control again.
Notes
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
4
TV
AV
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
3
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
1
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
SRCH MODE
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
PTY SEEK
START
1
2
Press TUNER on the remote control and then
press BAND to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
TUNER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
FM
Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
51 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
3
Press EON on the remote control repeatedly
to select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or
SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
Notes
NEWS
EON
• You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System modes
being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
modes are available.
Lights up
y
To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control
repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears
and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
4
TV
AV
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
2
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
1
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
SRCH MODE
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
PTY SEEK
START
1
Press TUNER on the remote control and then
press BAND to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
TUNER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
FM
52 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
2
Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
FREQ/TEX
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
53 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting), also known as digital radio, is a new way of radio broadcasting. DAB is broadcast
using digital signals instead of analog signals, resulting in near CD-quality sound. Analog signals (i.e. AM/FM) are
susceptible to interference (i.e. distorting and noise) caused by electrical equipment, weather conditions, tall buildings,
mountains, etc. whereas digital signals are not. Thus, with DAB, there is virtually interference-free reception and no hiss
or crackle.
Another advantage of DAB is that a large amount of information can be carried within the digital signal. DAB is
broadcast in blocks of data called ensembles (also known as multiplexes). Several radio programs called services can be
broadcast simultaneously in each ensemble. This means that you can choose between several radio programs within one
frequency.
In addition to the audio signal, service information is also broadcast and displayed in the front panel display of this unit.
Part of the service information is text data information called Dynamic Label Segment (DLS). For more information, see
page 59.
With DAB, there is no need to remember channel frequencies. All broadcasts are selected by simply selecting the service
name.
Notes
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all
Ensemble
areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB
statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org/”.
• The sound quality and service information are controlled by the
DAB broadcaster, not this unit. Not all DAB broadcasters
transmit service information.
• DAB signals are broadcast in Band-III (174 – 240 MHz) and
L-Band (1452 – 1492 MHz). This unit is able to receive both
bands.
Service
Audio signal
and
service information
54 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB services, you have to perform the
initial scan.
3
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or
on the remote control) to start the initial
scan operation.
This unit starts the scan for DAB ensembles. While
the scan is in progress, “Scanning” and the
percentage of the progress of the scan appears in the
front panel display. When this unit completes the
scan, “FINISH” and the number of receivable DAB
services appears in the front panel display, and then
this unit enters the DAB tuning mode automatically.
u
/
d
/
j
/
i
2 3
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
A/B/C/D/E
or
ENTER
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
1
PRESET/CH
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
1
2
3
4
TV
AV
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
Scanning 30%
FINISH [015]
TITLE
BAND
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
2
SRCH MODE
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
3
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
PTY SEEK
START
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press TUNER on the remote control) to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
Example: if 15 DAB services were found
INPUT
TUNER
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
or
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
BBC RADIO 4
Front panel
Remote control
Notes
• If the initial scan operation is not successful, “Not
Press DAB on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) repeatedly to select DAB
as the reception band.
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel display.
When you did not perform the initial scan, “Initiate
Scan” appears in the front panel display.
Available” appears in the front panel display. You can start
panel (or u/ d / j/ ion the remote control). When you
want to exit the DAB tuning mode, press BAND on the
remote control to select the other bands.
• For further details about problems and their proper
remedies, see the “Tuner” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 94.
LEVEL
FM/AM
DAB
or
TITLE
BAND
Remote control
Front panel
Lights up
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
y
When you already performed the initial scan before you set
this unit to the DAB tuning mode for the first time, “Initiate
Scan” does not appear in the front panel display. See step 3
on page 56, and proceed with the DAB tuning operation.
55 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB tuning
There are five DAB tuning methods:
“ALPHANUMERIC”, “ACTIVE”, “ENSEMBLE”,
“FAVOURITE”, and “PRESET”. You can select the
desired services with the channel labels displayed in the
front panel display.
2
Press DAB on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) repeatedly to select
“DAB” as the reception band.
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel display
while this unit is in the DAB tuning mode.
LEVEL
FM/AM
DAB
or
TITLE
BAND
Note
Front panel
Remote control
Once you perform an initial scan, the registry list of available
services is updated automatically as long as this unit is in the
DAB tuning mode. To register new ensembles, perform an initial
scan again (see page 62).
DAB
2
Lights up
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
3
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select the desired DAB tuning
method.
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
ALPHANUMERIC
3
4
1
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
1
2
3
4
TV
AV
ACTIVE
ENSEMBLE
FAVOURITE
PRESET
Front panel
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
3
4
2
SRCH MODE
or
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
PTY SEEK
START
MENU
SRCH MODE
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press TUNER on the remote control
repeatedly) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
Remote control
• Select “ALPHANUMERIC” to browse through all
of the registered DAB services in the alphanumeric
order.
INPUT
TUNER
or
• Select “ACTIVE” to browse through all of the
receivable DAB services in the alphabetical order.
• Select “ENSEMBLE” to browse through the
registered channel labels from the lowest to the
highest channel labels.
Front panel
Remote control
• Select “FAVOURITE” to browse through the top
10 services most frequently selected with this unit.
• Select “PRESET” to tune into preset DAB services
by entering the corresponding preset service
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
Note
For details about tuning into preset DAB services, see
pages 57 and 58.
56 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB preset tuning
You can use the DAB preset tuning feature to store preset
DAB services in the memory. You can then recall any
preset service easily by selecting the preset service
number assigned to the corresponding DAB service.
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) repeatedly to search for registered
DAB services.
2,4
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
ENTER
or
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
VOLUME
LEVEL
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/CH
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
Front panel
Remote control
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
y
To return to the top of the list, press A/B/C/D/E on the front
panel (or j/ ion the remote control).
3
Notes
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
• The SECONDARY indicator lights up when this unit is
receiving a secondary service. This unit returns to the
corresponding primary service when the secondary service
becomes timed out.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
3
2,4
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
• You can change the information in the front panel display. See
page 59 for details.
1
2
Tune into the desired DAB service.
See page 56 for tuning instructions.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
BBC RADIO 4
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or DAB
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Front panel
MEMORY
or
Flashes
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
Remote control
57 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
3
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) repeatedly until “EMPTY” appears
next to the preset service number in the front
panel display.
Selecting preset DAB services
You can tune into any desired DAB service simply by
entering the corresponding preset service number under
which it was stored.
VOLUME
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
STANDBY
/ON
ENTER
or
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
Front panel
Remote control
2
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
Flashes
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
MEMORY
VOLUME
dB
TUNED
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
DAB
SP
2
A
PRESET/CH
L
R
PCM
55 EMPTY
1
Select “DAB” as the reception band and then
select “PRESET” as the DAB tuning method.
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Preset service number
y
• “EMPTY” appears when no preset DAB service is
assigned to the corresponding service number.
• You can select the desired preset service number directly
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
See page 56 for the DAB tuning instruction.
PRESET
Note
Any stored DAB service data existing under a preset service
number is cleared when you store a new service under the
same preset service number.
Lights up
4
5
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or DAB
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
MEMORY
or
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Remote control
Front panel
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to store other DAB
services.
Note
While you are browsing and changing the SET MENU
parameters, you cannot preset any DAB service.
58 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
DAB service information
Use this feature to display various information about the
DAB service currently being received.
2
Press PRESET/TUNING l/ hon the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote
control) to browse through the preset DAB
services in the registry list.
Unassigned preset service numbers are skipped and
only assigned preset service numbers along with their
DAB service names appear in the front panel display
for approximately 3 seconds.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
ENTER
or
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
SET MENU
TITLE
BAND
MENU
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
Press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the
remote control) repeatedly while a DAB service is
currently being broadcast.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
PRESET
SP
A
L
R
PCM
56 BBC Radio 4
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
or
DISPLAY
Preset service number
AUTO/MAN'L
Front panel
Remote control
Approximately after
3 seconds
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
DAB
CD
VOLUME
dB
PRESET
SP
A
L
R
PCM
BBC Radio 4
y
• You can select the desired preset service number directly
by pressing the numeric buttons and ENTER on the
remote control. To enter numbers less than 10 (i.e. 1 to 9),
simply press 0 and then the number itself. For example, to
select the preset DAB service assigned to preset service
number 7, press 0 and then 7 in turn.
• “EMPTY” appears briefly when no preset DAB service is
assigned to the corresponding preset service number. The
DAB service currently being received is then displayed in
the front panel display.
59 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
Each time you press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on
the remote control), information displayed in the front
panel display changes in the following order.
Service label
Displays the name of the current DAB service up to 16
characters.
Dynamic Label Segment (DLS)
Order
Information type
Example
Displays information about the current DAB service.
Examples are the title of the current song or program, the
name of the artist or speaker, and the name of the next
song or program. This data is continuously updated by the
DAB broadcaster, thus changing often with every new
song or program. Other data, such as news, weather, and
sports headlines, may be broadcast as well.
1
Service label
Classic FM
Dynamic Label
Segment
(DLS)
Classic FM on
the internet...
2
3
Digital1
Network
Ensemble label
Ensemble label
Displays the name of the current ensemble up to 16
characters.
4
5
Program type
Date and time
Classic Music
05JUL05 10:50
Program type
Displays the genre (song or program type) of the current
DAB service up to 16 characters.
Audio mode and
bit rate
6
Stereo 160kbps
Date and time
Displays the current date and time. This data is updated
with each passing minute.
Channel label and
frequency
7
8
11D 222.06MHz
SignalQ.: 100
Signal quality
Audio mode and bit rate
Displays the audio mode and bit rate of the current DAB
service.
Notes
• The information order starts from the beginning again after the
signal quality information has been displayed in the front panel
display.
• If the DAB information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with an
underscore “_”.
Channel label and frequency
Displays the channel label and frequency of the current
DAB service.
Signal quality
Displays the signal quality (from 0 (none) to 100 (best)) of
the current DAB service. A higher number means a better
reception level.
y
The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. The dynamic label segment scrolls in a
continuous manner and the service label, ensemble label and
program type scroll at once.
60 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
Using DAB MENU
There are 5 operations in DAB MENU: “INIT SCAN”,
“TUNE AID”, “DRC MODE”, “PRUNE LIST”, and
“PRESET DEL”. Use the remote control to access and
adjust each operation in DAB MENU.
4
5
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
For details about each operation, see pages 62 to 65.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
4
TV
AV
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
1
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
3,5
4
2
SRCH MODE
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
3
PTY SEEK
START
MENU
SRCH MODE
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
TUNER
2
3
Press BAND repeatedly to select “DAB” as
the reception band.
The DAB indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
LEVEL
TITLE
DAB
BAND
Lights up
Press AMP and then press SET MENU.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
SET MENU
AMP
MENU
SRCH MODE
A)INIT SCAN
61 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Initial scan A)INIT SCAN
Use this feature to locate all of the DAB ensembles and
services in your area. When “INIT SCAN” is selected, this
unit scans the entire range of Band III and L-Band (or the
limited range of Band III, if selected), and creates a
services.
3
4
Press ENTER to confirm the desired option.
“SCAN?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel
display.
SCAN?[ENTER]
y
When you want to cancel the initial scan, press RETURN on
the remote control.
1
Press u/ drepeatedly to select “INIT SCAN”
in “DAB MENU”, and then press ENTER.
See page 61 for details.
Press ENTER again to start the selected
initial scan operation.
The current setting appears in the front panel display.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
This unit starts scanning the selected band(s) for
DAB ensembles. While scanning is in progress,
“Scanning” appears in the front panel display. Once
scanning has been completed, “FINISH [###]”
appears in the front panel display for approximately 3
seconds (“###” indicates the number of receivable
DAB services), and then this unit returns to the DAB
tuning mode automatically.
SCAN:FULL
2
Press j/ ito select the desired option.
ENTER
Scanning 30%
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
FINISH [015]
Example: if 15 DAB services were found
SCAN:FULL
SCAN:UK BAND3
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DAB
SP
Choices: FULL, UK BAND3
A
L
R
PCM
BBC RADIO 4
• Select “FULL” to scan both Band III (174 – 240
MHz) and L-Band (1452 – 1490 MHz) for DAB
ensembles.
• Select “UK BAND3” to scan within the range of
Band III limited for United Kingdom (218 – 230
MHz) for DAB ensembles.
Note
If the initial scan operation was not successful, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display. In such cases,
press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or u/ don the remote
control) to start “INIT SCAN” automatically.
y
“BREAK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display,
press ENTER on the remote control to return to “INIT
SCAN”.
• For further details about problems and their proper
remedies, see the “Tuner” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 94.
62 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Tuning aid B)TUNE AID
■ DRC mode C)DRC MODE
Use this feature to display the strength of the current DAB
signals in the front panel display. You can use this feature
to adjust the positioning of the DAB antenna and this unit.
It is recommended that you perform this operation when
reception capability.
Some DAB broadcasters transmit a wide dynamic range
enabling high quality sound, accompanied by DRC
(Dynamic Range Control) data. Use this feature to
compress the dynamic range of the DAB broadcast. This
noisy environment or at a low volume at night.
1
Press u/ dto select “TUNE AID” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
See page 61 for details.
1
Press u/ dto select “DRC MODE” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
See page 61 for details.
The signal strength level of the selected DAB channel
appears in the front panel display.
The current setting appears in the front panel display.
Display status: 0 (none) to 100 (best)
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
DRC MODE:AUTO
DAB
SP
A
L
R
PCM
5A LEVEL: 80
2
Press j/ ito select the desired option.
Selected DAB
channel label
Signal strength level
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
3
Press j/ ito switch between channel labels.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
DRC MODE:AUTO
DRC MODE:OFF
y
For a complete list of channel labels, see “DAB frequency
information” on page 102.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Press ENTER.
This unit returns to the “TUNE AID” menu.
• Select “AUTO” to utilize DRC data (if
transmitted). The dynamic range of the DAB
signals is compressed, enhancing the audio quality
in a noisy environment or at a low volume at night.
• Select “OFF” not to utilize DRC data (if
transmitted). The dynamic range of the DAB
signals is played in full, enabling high quality
sound.
ENTER
B)TUNE AID
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
63 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Prune list D)PRUNE LIST
Use this feature to delete a group of inactive DAB
ensembles and services from the DAB registry list.
Note
If “AUTO” is selected and the DAB broadcast contains
DRC data, the DRC indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
1
Press u/ dto select “PRUNE LIST” in “DAB
MENU”, and then press ENTER.
See page 61 for details.
3
Press ENTER.
This unit returns to the “DRC MODE” menu.
“OK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
C)DRC MODE
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
OK?[ENTER]
2
Press ENTER again to confirm your
selection.
Inactive DAB ensembles and services are deleted
from the DAB registry list. Once this operation has
been completed, “FINISH” appears in the front panel
display, and then this unit returns to the “PRUNE
LIST” menu.
ENTER
FINISH
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
D)PRUNE LIST
64 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) TUNING
■ Preset delete E)PRESET DEL
services from the DAB registry list.
4
Press ENTER to delete the selected preset
DAB service from the DAB registry list.
Once this operation is has been completed, “DELETE
OK” appears in the front panel display, and then this
unit returns to the “PRESET DEL” menu.
1
Press u/ dto select “PRESET DEL” in
“DAB MENU”, and then press ENTER.
See page 61 for details.
“DELETE:--” appears in the front panel display.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
DELETE OK
DELETE:--
2
Press j/ ito select the desired preset
service number.
E)PRESET DEL
y
To cancel the procedure, press RETURN.
ENTER
DELETE:56
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
Note
Only the preset service number appears in the front panel
display.
3
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
“OK?[ENTER]” appears in the front panel display.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
OK?[ENTER]
65 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and
shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound
fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA
has done with the digital sound field processor.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 36).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs
are applied.
■ Front panel operations
■ Remote control operations
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
AMP
PTY SEEK
START
VOLUME
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
sound field program
selector buttons
2
3
4
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
5
7
8
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
9
0
10
PROGRAM l/ hbuttons
Press AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control
repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front
panel repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
66 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field program descriptions
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”
to “AUTO” (see page 32) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
Notes
• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming
from the front, back, left and right.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
■ For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
y
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel (or press AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 66).
Remote
control
button
Sound FIeld Program
Features
Sources
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as they are.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
1
2
CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can
feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert
hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports
programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
MULTI
2-CH
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old
movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the
presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
3
CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game
sounds.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
67 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Remote
control
button
Sound FIeld Program
Features
Sources
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field
employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
4
MULTI
2-CH
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
MOVIE THEATER
General
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. STANDARD
SUR. ENHANCED
5
■ For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
y
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel (or press AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 66).
Remote
control
button
Sound field program
Features
Sources
2-CH
Plays back 2-channel sources.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
1
2
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.
STEREO
6ch Stereo
HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
MULTI
2-CH
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and
energetic sound.
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
3
5
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. STANDARD
SUR. ENHANCED
68 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Changing sound field parameter
settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
2
3
Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT S
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
Notes
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 87).
• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
Press u/ dto select the desired sound field
parameter and then j/ ito change the
selected sound field parameter value.
• Press ito increase the value.
• Press jto decrease the value.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 70.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
• If you press and hold j/ ito change the sound field parameter
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the
front panel display.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
FREQ/TEXT
EON
AMP
1
2
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
3
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
1
Press AMP on the remote control.
AMP
69 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 69 for details.
Sound field parameter
Features
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
DSP LEVEL
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
INIT. DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT. DLY and P. INIT. DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S. INIT. DLY and SB INI. DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
70 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB RM SIZE
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Live
Dead
Time
Time
Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
71 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
REV.TIME
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
REV.DELAY
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.TIME
72 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
REV.LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
REV. LEVEL
Time
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo
sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 30).
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 82).
– “FRONT” is set to “SMALL” (see page 82) and “BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see
page 82).
6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the volume
level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.
6ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
73 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Choices: OFF, ON
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CT WIDTH
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
DTS Neo:6 Music
C. IMAGE
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
y
The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when
“SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Press AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select
“SUR. STANDARD” (see page 40).
74 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field program speaker layouts
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table
below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.
Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as
special sound effects, etc.
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “6ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speaker (see
page 39).
The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:
L
C
R
SL
SR
SB
Front left speaker
Center speaker
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back speaker
Front right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being out
Speaker from which no sound is being output
*
When the qEX / qPL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
Sound field program
5.1/6.1-channel audio *
(stereo)
STEREO
2ch Stereo
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
Monaural playback
STEREO
6ch Stereo
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
The Bttm Line
The Roxy Thtr
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
75 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
Sound field program
5.1/6.1-channel audio *
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
Mono Movie
Game
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
Adventure
General
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
SUR. STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
Pro Logic
Pro Logic
SUR. STANDARD
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
C
C
L
R
L
R
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
Movie / Game
Pro Logic II
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
Pro Logic IIx
Music
SUR. STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
Cinema
Cinema/Music
C
L
R
SL
SR
SB
Music
76 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
Sound field program
5.1/6.1-channel audio *
SUR. ENHANCED
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
Pro Logic
Pro Logic
SUR. ENHANCED
PLII Movie
PLIIx Movie
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
Pro Logic II
C
L
R
SL
SR
SB
Pro Logic IIx
SUR. ENHANCED
Neo:6 Cinema
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
STRAIGHT
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
SB
Monaural playback
DIRECT STEREO
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SB
SB
Monaural playback
77 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
SET MENU
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP
Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 26).
■ MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Parameter
Features
Page
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
82
A)SPEAKER SET
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
83
83
84
84
84
84
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
C)SP DISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
E)LFE LEVEL
F)D. RANGE
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
G)AUDIO SET
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Parameter
A)INPUT ASSIGN
B)INPUT MODE
C)INPUT RENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
Features
Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
Page
85
85
Changes the name of the input source.
85
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
86
78 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
DAB menu 3 DAB MENU
Use this menu to manually perform the DAB operations. For details, See “Using DAB MENU” on page 61.
Parameter
A)INIT SCAN
B)TUNE AID
Features
Page
62
Locates all of the DAB ensembles and services in your area.
Displays the strength of the current DAB signals.
63
Compresses the dynamic range of the DAB broadcast.
63
C)DRC MODE
Deletes a group of inactive DAB ensembles and services from the DAB registry list.
Specifies and deletes unnecessary DAB services from the DAB registry list.
64
D)PRUNE LIST
E)PRESET DEL
65
Option menu 4 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
Parameter
A)DISPLAY SET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)PARAM. INI
D)MULTI ZONE
Features
Page
87
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
87
87
87
79 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
Using SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
3
4
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
“1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel
display.
FREQ/TEXT
EON
AMP
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
1
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
PRESET/CH
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
1 SOUND MENU
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
1,7
2-6
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.
The following menus appear in the front panel
display as you press u/ drepeatedly.
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”
operation is canceled.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
Note
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
listening mode (see page 31).
3 DAB MENU
1
Press AMP and then press SET MENU to
enter “SET MENU”.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
4 OPTION MENU
SET MENU
AMP
MENU
5
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
SRCH MODE
Repeat step 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items
you want to adjust.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
.
BASIC SETUP
2
Press u/ dto select “MANUAL SETUP” and
then press ENTER.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
.
MANUAL SETUP
80 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
6
Press u/ dto select the desired parameter
and then j/ ito change the parameter
settings.
• Press ito increase the value.
• Press jto decrease the value.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
7
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
81 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
1 SOUND MENU
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 41) and “SUR. B” is automatically set
to “NONE” (see below).
Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 82).
Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
•
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
•
Front speakers FRONT
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
•
Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in BASS OUT.
Surround back speakers SUR. B
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a
surround back speaker. The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround
back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround back channel are directed to the speakers
selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 82).
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
•
Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
•
Note
If “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 82), the LFE signals
found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals
of other speakers set to “SML” or to “NONE” are all directed to
the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT”
setting.
•
Center speaker CENTER
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
LFE/Bass out BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
•
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
•
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “BASS
OUT” (see page 82).
•
Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” are
all directed to the front left and right speakers
regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 82).
Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” are
directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels are directed to the
front left and right speakers and the subwoofer
regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 82).
•
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
•
82 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
Crossover CROSSOVER
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 82). All frequencies below
the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to
the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 82).
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NRM, REV
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
•
•
Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
•
Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase
of your subwoofer.
Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
•
■ Speaker level B) SP LEVEL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround
back speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 82). The
selected speaker outputs test tone and the speaker
indicator of the speaker flashes.
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
The following is an example where “FL” is selected to
adjust the balance of the front left speaker.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
SP
A
L
C
R
SL
SR
FL ----||----
Flashes
•
•
Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
Note
“CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR. B” and “SWFR”
cannot be adjusted if “CENTER” (see page 82), “SUR. LR” (see
page 82), “SUR. B” (see page 82) and “BASS OUT” (see
page 82) are set to “NONE” respectively.
•
•
Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.
Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left
speaker.
•
•
•
Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right
speaker.
Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back
speaker.
Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
Note
“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if
“CENTER” (see page 82), “SUR. LR” (see page 82), “SUR. B”
(see page 82) and “BASS OUT” (see page 82) are set to “NONE”
respectively.
83 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker SP D.R
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Control range: –6 to +6 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Headphone HP D.R
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
y
•
Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Press u/ dto select a frequency band and j/ ito adjust the
selected frequency band.
•
•
Following is an example where “100 Hz” is selected as the
frequency band.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
SP
A
100Hz--||-- 0
dB
Muting type MUTE TYP.
Test tone TEST
Choices: OFF, ON
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 31).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
•
Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
•
Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
•
Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
output.
•
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TC.BYPASS
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are
set to 0 dB (see page 30).
Speaker SP LFE
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
•
Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
Headphone HP LFE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
•
Note
Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 82), some
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
84 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input
mode or rename the input source.
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”
back to “AUTO” (see page 32) regardless of the previous
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on
this unit.
■ Input assignment
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs. Change the following
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
•
Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to
“AUTO” (see page 32) regardless of the previous
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit
automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on
the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote
control).
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.
•
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
C.V[A]
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the front panel display.
C.V[B]
C.V[C]
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed
“My DVD”.
DVR V-AUX
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R
TUNER
CD
VOLUME
dB
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1and 2
IN (1)
SP
A
L
SL
C
R
SR
DVD My DVD
IN (2)
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CDR, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
1
2
Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
(2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 3 COAXIAL IN (3)
Choices: (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
Press AMP and then press j/ ion the remote
control to place the “_” (underscore) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
AMP
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
85 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
3 DAB MENU
the DAB ensemble/service registry list. See page 61 for
details about this menu.
3
Press u/ dto select the character you want
to use and then press j/ ito move to the
next space.
■ Initial scan A) INIT SCAN
See page 62 for details.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
■ Tuning aid B) TUNE AID
See page 63 for details.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
■ DRC mode C) DRC MODE
See page 63 for details.
Notes
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
press uto go in the reverse order:
■ Prune list D) PRUNE LIST
See page 64 for details.
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
■ Preset delete E) PRESET DEL
See page 65 for details.
4
5
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
Press SET MENU on the remote control to
exit from “INPUT RENAME”.
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to 6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
86 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET MENU
■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.
4 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
Speaker B setting SP B
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Control step: 1
•
Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main zone.
•
Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers in the main zone are muted
and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B
terminals only.
•
•
Press jto make the front panel display dimmer.
Press ito make the front panel display brighter.
■ Memory guard B) MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
Notes
•
Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
Select “ON” to protect:
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.
•
– DSP program parameters
– All “SET MENU” items
– All speaker levels
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 41).
Note
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound field
program that you want to initialize.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD
Notes
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.
87 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED SETUP
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the
remote control) to turn on this unit (see page 25).
• Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons are effective while you are using the advanced
setup menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
3
front panel repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
See page 89 for a complete list of available
parameters.
l
PROGRAM
h
1-2,5
3
2,4
1
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
Currently selected
parameter
Currently selected
parameter setting
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.-8 MIN
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
4
5
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the selected
parameter setting.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
While holding
down
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
save the new setting and set this unit to the
standby mode.
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
88 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
■ Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 93).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
•
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.
•
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
•
unit.
•
Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
SP IMP.
Speaker
Impedance level
Notes
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
8ΩMIN
*
higher.
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround back
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
6ΩMIN
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround back
89 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
each input source (see page 92).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
Press AMP to control this unit.
■ Controlling a TV
Press DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV,
you must set the appropriate remote control code for
DTV/CBL (see page 92).
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
*1
TV
AV
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
*1
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
REC
REC
CODE SET
CODE SET
DISC SKIP
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
SLEEP
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
AMP
AMP
AMP
*1
PTY SEEK
START
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
*1
*2
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
2
3
4
2
3
4
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
ENT.
9
0
10
9
0
10
*2
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE
SRCH MODE
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
RETURN
DAB MEMORY
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Notes
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit.
*1 These buttons always control your TV.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when AMP is pressed.
Remote control
Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV VOL +/–
TV CH +/–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
Changes the channel number.
Mutes the audio output.
Changes the input source.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when DTV/CBL is
pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column
on page 91.
90 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling other components
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes (see
page 92), use the input selector buttons and to select the
component you want to control. Note that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
1
2
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
4
TV
AV
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
3
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
7
8
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
V-AUX
LEVEL
SET MENU
MENU
TITLE
BAND
4
5
6
MULTI CH IN
REC
CODE SET
SRCH MODE
ENTER
DISC SKIP
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
MODE
EON
9
AMP
DAB MEMORY
PRESET/CH
PTY SEEK
START
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
Remote
control
Digital TV/
Cable TV
DVD player
VCR
CD player
MD/CD recorder
Tuner
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*1
Power
Power
Power
VCR power
Power
Power
1
2
AV POWER
REC/
DISC SKIP
*3
*2, 3
O
Disc Skip
Play
Rec (MD)
Rec
VCR rec
*2
p
Play
Play
Play
VCR play
VCR search
backward
w
Search backward
Search backward
Search backward
Search forward
Search backward
*2
VCR search
f
Search forward
Search forward
Pause
Search forward
*2
forward
*2
e
Pause
Skip backward
Skip forward
Stop
Pause
Skip backward
Skip forward
Stop
Pause
Skip backward
Skip forward
Stop
VCR pause
b
a
s
*2
Stop
VCR stop
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Preset stations (1-8)
Band
3
4
5
0-9, +10
Title
Up
TITLE
VCR channel up
Preset up (1-8)
PRESET/CH u
PRESET/CH d
A-E/CAT. j
A-E/CAT. i
ENTER
Down
Left
VCR channel down
Preset down (1-8)
Preset down (A-E)
Preset up (A-E)
Right
Select
Return
Title/Index
Menu
6
7
8
9
RETURN
ENT.
Enter
Enter
Index
Index
MENU
Display
Display
Display
Display
DISPLAY
Notes
*1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons can operate your VCR when the remote control code of your VCR is set in DVR and DTV/CBL is selected.
*3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.
91 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. You can set the remote
control codes for each input source. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual.
1
While holding down CODE SET, press one of
the input selector button or to select the
component you want to set up.
While holding
CD
MD/CD-R
DTV/CBL
down
CODE SET
DVD
DVR
V-AUX
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input source.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
Note
Library
(component
category)
You need hold to down CODE SET throughout this procedure.
Input
source
Default
code
Manufacturer
2
While holding down CODE SET, press the
numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the three-
digit remote control code for the component
to be used.
CD
MD/CD-R
DVD
CD
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
199
499
699
CD-R
DVD
When the setting succeeds, “PRESET OK” appears;
however, when it does not, “PRESET NG” appears in
the front panel display. Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE
CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual.
TUNER
*1
TUNER
–
YAMAHA
–
Fixed
–
DTV/CBL
*2
While holding
down
STEREO
1
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
CODE SET
2
3
4
DVR
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
STANDARD
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
DIRECT ST.
5
7
8
SPEAKERS
ENHANCER
NIGHT STRAIGHT
ENT.
9
0
10
V-AUX
Notes
*1 You can control this unit only.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• You can only assign one remote control code to each input
selector button.
*2 You can only set TV remote control codes in DTV/CBL.
Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.
92 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY
on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.
3
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the
front panel to select “PRESET”.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
l
PROGRAM
h
FM/AM
DAB
A/B/C/D/E
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
EDIT
NEXT
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
PHONES
SPEAKERS
VIDEO AUX
A
B
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
PORTABLE
1-2,5
3
2,4
PRESET-CANCEL
1
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
PRESET-RESET
y
While holding
down
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
5
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
confirm your selection and set this unit to the
standby mode.
STANDBY
/ON
93 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
24
12
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16–23
32
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
29, 36
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
12
29
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B
and/or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the
remote control.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Turn up the volume.
—
31
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded in DTS.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
32
—
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
No picture
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Connect your video source components in the same
way as you connect your video monitor to this unit.
17
94 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
24
—
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
The sound is muted.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
31
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16–23
83
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”.
82
66
82
36
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for Try another sound field program.
6ch Stereo) has been selected.
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. LR” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speaker.
“SUR. LR” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SUR. B” is automatically
set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. LR” and “SUR. B” to “SML” or “LRG”.
82
“SUR. B” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. B” to “SML” or “LRG”.
82
82
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to
“FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
“BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to
“SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
82
The source does not contain low-
frequency bass signals.
95 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
32
display does not light
up.)
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
17–19
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
IN jacks.
The sound field
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
87
—
parameters and some is set to “ON”.
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
—
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.
frequency equipment.
frequency equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
96 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away
or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
21
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
44
—
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with
a good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
FM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
44
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
45, 46
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
44
—
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
AM
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
Perform the initial scan operations.
—
62
Cannot tune into any
DAB services.
The initial scan operations were not
performed, or the DAB registry list
needs to be updated.
There is no DAB coverage in your
area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
—
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
22
The initial scan
The DAB antenna may not be
connected.
Make sure the DAB antenna is firmly
connected.
operations are not
successful and “Not
Available” appears in
the front panel display.
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
—
There is no DAB coverage in your
area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB
online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB
The DAB service
reception is weak.
The positioning of the indoor DAB
antenna and/or this unit is not optimal
for DAB reception.
Use the tuning aid feature to locate the best
positioning of the DAB antenna and this
unit for optimal DAB reception.
63
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
—
—
There is noise
The indoor DAB antenna needs to be
repositioned.
Readjust the position of the indoor DAB
antenna.
interference (e.g. hiss
or crackle).
The DAB signals are too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
—
—
The DAB service
information does not
appear or is
The DAB service may be temporarily
out of service, or the DAB service
information is not provided by the
DAB broadcaster.
inaccurate.
97 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis
from the front panel.
7
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
92
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
92
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
98 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Audio information
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right and LFE
0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
99 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
100 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
Video information
Sound field program information
■ Component video signal
■ CINEMA DSP
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
101 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
*
*
*
225.648 MHz
227.360 MHz
229.072 MHz
230.784 MHz
232.496 MHz
234.208 MHz
235.776 MHz
237.488 MHz
239.200 MHz
12B
12C
12D
13A
13B
13C
13D
13E
13F
DAB frequency information
■ Band III
Note
When you select “UK BAND3” in the initial scan operation, this
unit scans only within the frequencies marked with an asterisk (*)
in the following table (see page 62).
Frequency
174.928 MHz
Channel label
5A
176.640 MHz
178.352 MHz
180.064 MHz
181.936 MHz
183.648 MHz
185.360 MHz
187.072 MHz
188.928 MHz
190.640 MHz
192.352 MHz
194.064 MHz
195.936 MHz
197.648 MHz
199.360 MHz
201.072 MHz
202.928 MHz
204.640 MHz
206.352 MHz
208.064 MHz
209.936 MHz
211.648 MHz
213.360 MHz
215.072 MHz
216.928 MHz
218.640 MHz
220.352 MHz
222.064 MHz
223.936 MHz
5B
5C
■ L-Band
5D
Frequency
Channel label
6A
1452.960 MHz
1454.672 MHz
1456.384 MHz
1458.096 MHz
1459.808 MHz
1461.520 MHz
1463.232 MHz
1464.944 MHz
1466.656 MHz
1468.368 MHz
1470.080 MHz
1471.792 MHz
1473.504 MHz
1475.216 MHz
1476.928 MHz
1478.640 MHz
1480.352 MHz
1482.064 MHz
1483.776 MHz
1485.488 MHz
1487.200 MHz
1488.912 MHz
1490.624 MHz
LA
LB
LC
LD
LE
LF
LG
LH
LI
6B
6C
6D
7A
7B
7C
7D
8A
8B
LJ
8C
LK
LL
LM
LN
LO
LP
LQ
LR
LS
LT
8D
9A
9B
9C
9D
10A
10B
10C
10D
11A
11B
11C
11D
12A
LU
LV
LW
*
*
*
*
102 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 90 W
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 120/155/190/235 W
• Maximum Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround
back
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 140 W
• IEC Output Power
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................... 100 W + 100 W
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 120 or more
• Frequency Response
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
CD, etc. .................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
V-AUX ..................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB
DAB SECTION
• Tuning Range
• Total Harmonic Distortion
(Band III) ............................................................. 174 to 240 MHz
(L-Band) .......................................................... 1452 to 1492 MHz
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω)
............................................................................... 0.06% or less
• Sensitivity
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Band III) ........................................................................ –99 dBm
(L-Band) ......................................................................... –95 dBm
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 97 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion ..................................................... 0.01%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................ 95dB
• Frequency Response ................................. 20 Hz to 20 kHz/ 0.5 dB
SP OUT .................................................................. 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) ............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... 10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply ........................................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Power Consumption .............................................................. 360 W
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets ............................................. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm
• Weight .................................................................................. 10.7 kg
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Rated Input Voltage
Composite .................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (Y) ................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (C) .......................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (Y) .......................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (PB, PR) ................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
103 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
RCA
293, 297, 234,
256, 257, 258
223, 269, 265, 266
297
297, 239, 248,
262, 275
MARANTZ
MARTA
MATSUI
MEMOREX
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348,
359, 353
392, 394
396
396
328, 336, 396, 397
333, 349
TV
ADMIRAL
AIWA
AKAI
ALBA
AOC
DVD PLAYER
292, 293
276, 283, 284, 294
295, 296
296
SABA
SAMPO
SAMSUNG
DENON
623, 624
FUNAI
HITACHI
JVC
625
626
627
628
297
SANYO
295, 233, 279,
272, 273, 274, 212
KENWOOD
BELL&HOWELL
292
298
BLAUPUNKT 222, 229
MTC
363, 397
LG/GOLD STAR
645
MITSUBISHI 629
SCHNEIDER 296
SCOTT
SHARP
MULTITECH 397, 348, 354
NEC
NOKIA OCEANIC
395
NOKIA
OKANO
OLYMPIC
ORION
PANASONIC 325, 328, 355,
378, 384, 385, 386
PENTAX
PHILCO
PHILIPS
BESTAR
297
392, 394, 344, 383
292, 239, 232,
213, 216
229
ONKYO
632, 633, 634
BLUE SKY
BRANDT
BROCSONIC 297
BUSH 296
CLATRONIC 298
CRAIG
CROSLEX
CURTIS MATHIS
226, 297
DAEWOO
298
223
PANASONIC 623, 635
SIEMENS
SIGNATURE 292
SONY
SYLVANIA
393, 395
323
325, 328
327
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
699, 647
636, 637, 638
639
263, 214
297, 225
SAMSUNG
SHARP
642
643
224
225
TELEFUNKEN 269, 264, 265, 266
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
VIDECH
WARDS
YAMAHA
223, 266
292, 226, 267, 215
297, 242
297, 239, 232
213, 299, 292,
253, 242
SONY
644
333, 349
325, 328, 397
325, 326, 328,
337, 356, 357
337
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
646
634
224, 227, 228,
297, 298
239
298
622, 623, 647, 699
DAYTRON
DUAL
PHONOLA
PILOT
CD PLAYER
396
DWIN
EMERSON
293
PIONEER
QUASAR
325
325, 328
YAMAHA
199
VCR
224, 232, 239, 297
FERGUSON 223, 265, 266
FIRST LINE 298
ADMIRAL
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMIC
392, 394
BELL&HOWELL
393
BLAUPUNKT 325, 326
BROCSONIC 327
395
RCA/PROSCAN
CD RECORDER
396, 397, 398, 329
322, 323, 324
325, 326, 328,
333, 335, 349,
358, 363, 397
393, 397, 328,
336, 359, 396, 363
354, 358, 363,
364, 366
FUNAI
FISHER
FRABA
GE
277, 278
233, 295
298
234, 235, 236,
293, 297
YAMAHA
499
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
MD RECORDER
YAMAHA
599
LG/GOLDSTAR
297, 298, 239, 237
GOODMANS 296, 298, 223
SANSUI
SANYO
394
393, 336, 367
BUSH
322
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
229, 238, 249
297, 239, 242,
243, 285
296
296
CANON
CGM
CITIZEN
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHIS
397, 328, 333
DAEWOO
DBX
325, 328
396, 332
396
SCHNEIDER 337
SCOTT
399, 335, 336,
348, 359, 354, 358
ICE
396, 363
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
322
395, 382
393
IRRADIO
ITT/NOKIA
JC PENNY
JVC
KENDO
KTV
244, 245
293, 297, 234, 237
296, 246, 247, 286
298
328, 334, 335
392, 394
333
SIGNATURE 2000
395, 397
DIMENSIA
DYNATECH 397
SONY
368, 379, 372,
373, 374, 375
297, 239
LOEWE
LXI
298, 248
293, 297, 225,
226, 233
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
327, 334, 396, 397
393, 336
397
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC 397
TANDBERG 334
397, 325, 326, 328
MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239
GE
GO VIDEO
GOODMANS 334, 337
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
328, 333, 387
353
TANDY
397
396
392, 394
392, 394, 397
325, 328
396
MARANTZ
MATSUI
MEMOREX
298
295
297
TASHIRO
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
TELEFUNKEN 376, 377
THOMAS
THORN
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISON 363, 396
UNITECH 363
UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376
VIDEOSONIC 363
W.WHOUSE 396
332, 338
325, 333, 349,
342, 343
MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287
NEC
NOKIA
297, 252, 282
244, 245
INSTANT REPLAY
325, 328
393
NOKIA OCEANIC
245
NORDMENDE 265, 266
397
393, 396
335, 389
ITT/NOKIA
JC PENNY
392, 393, 394,
328, 333, 349,
396, 363
392, 394, 344,
345, 346, 347
396
ONWA
296
PANASONIC 234, 235, 236,
253, 288, 211
JVC
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
297, 225, 239
225, 298
226, 235, 254,
255, 268
KENDO
KENWOOD
LG/GOLDSTAR396, 388
LOEWE
LUXOR
LXI
392, 394, 396
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
395, 396, 336
399, 392, 393, 394
344, 368, 379,
396, 397
PORTLAND 297, 256
396, 337
395
393, 396, 397,
336, 349
PROSCAN
PROTON
QUASAR
293
297
234, 235
RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297
MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2006
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
WG76210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|